DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide (en)

Digital Scanner

Product Reference Guide

DS2278

MN-002915-13EN

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

DS2278 DIGITAL SCANNER

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE

MN-002915-13EN

Revision A

January 2023

ds2278-prg-en.book Page i

ii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means,

without permission in writing from Zebra. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying,

recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change

without notice.

The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on

a licensed basis. Zebra grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software

or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be

assigned, sub-licensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Zebra. No right to

copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall

not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create

a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission

from Zebra. The user agrees to maintain Zebra’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered

hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not

to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any

portion thereof.

Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.

Zebra does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any

product, circuit, or application described herein.

No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Zebra Technologies

Corporation, intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems

contained in Zebra products.

Warranty

For the complete Zebra hardware product warranty statement, go to: www.zebra.com/warranty.

Patents

ip.zebra.com

ds2278-prg-en.book Page ii

iii

Revision History

Changes to the original guide are listed below:

Change Date Description

MN-002915-01 Rev. A 7/2017 Initial Release.

MN-002915-02 Rev. A 8/2017 Removed "Microsoft UWP Bluetooth" information.

MN-002915-03 Rev. A 04/2018 Rev. B software and miscellaneous updates.

Added:

- Battery Preservation Timeout Value.

- Re-pair on Double Trigger Press.

- Note to Out of Range Batch Mode about Auto-Reconnect.

- Added note below Bluetooth Security.

Updated:

- Pairing bar code format with STC info.

- Values under bar codes for SSI baud rates: 230,400, 460,800,

921,600.

- Pairing Using the Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility.

- Max time value in Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout.

- Deleted Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection (not supported).

- Added note to MSI Reduced Quiet Zone (Level 3 not supported by

MSI).

- Changed Microsoft UWP USB to USB HID POS.

- Second paragraph under "Connection Maintenance Interval".

- 123Scan chapter

- Picklist Mode description.

- Trigger Mode, Presentation (Blink) description.

MN-002915-04 Rev. A 7/2018 Added:

- LED on Good Decode.

- Pairing Bar Code Format for Serial Port Connections.

- USB certification.

- Setting Up a Windows Product To Work With The Digital Scanner.

- New Appendix N - U

pgrading Over Bluetooth Without a Cradle.

Updated:

- One instance of Class 1 to Class 2.

- Firmware download option (not supported with Micro USB cable).

- Configurations.

- "Connecting the Cradle" and "Changing the Host Interface".

MN-002915-05 Rev. A 10/2018 - Added Grid Matrix sample bar code.

- Moved 123Scan chapter.

MN-002915-06 Rev. A 01/2020 - Added ARINC param.

- Updated URLs.

- Updated Zebra copyright statement.

MN-002915-07EN Rev. A 04/2020 - Split 123Scan chapter to Chapter 2 123Scan and Software Tools and

Chapter 14 Data Formatting: ADF.

- Updated Chapter 2 123Scan Requirements.

- Updated Chapter 3 introduction section.

- Updated Environmental Sealing in Table 4-2.

- Added the USB Cert information in Table 4-2.

MN-002915-08EN Rev. A 12/2020

Replaced offending terms.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page iii

iv DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

MN-002915-09EN Rev. A 02/2021

Updated LED on Good Decode.

MN-002915-10EN Rev. A 04/2021

Removed Bluetooth Classic Bluetooth and/or Low Energy (Cradle

Parameter Only/ Cradle Host Only).

MN-002915-11EN Rev. A 07/2021

Added Standard Bluetooth Version 4.0 with BLE.

MN-002915-12EN Rev. A 09/2021

Added DotCode, DotCode Inverse, DotCode Mirrored, DotCode

Prioritize, DotCode Erasure Limit, Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit,

Transmit Codabar Check Digit, Transmit Ean-8 Check Digit, Transmit

Ean-13 Check Digit, Weblink QR, and Linked QR Mode.

MN-002915-13EN Rev. A

01/2023

Add Virtual Tether parameters. Update Bluetooth State Note.

Change Date Description

ds2278-prg-en.book Page iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Warranty ............................................................................................................................................ ii

Patents............................................................................................................................................... ii

Revision History ................................................................................................................................. iii

About This Guide

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... xix

Configurations.................................................................................................................................. xix

Related Product Line Configurations ............................................................................................... xx

Cables........................................................................................................................................ xx

Chapter Descriptions ....................................................................................................................... xx

Notational Conventions.................................................................................................................... xxi

Related Documents ........................................................................................................................ xxii

Service Information ......................................................................................................................... xxii

Provide Documentation Feedback.................................................................................................. xxii

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Unpacking ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2

DS2278 Features ........................................................................................................................... 1-3

Cradle Features ............................................................................................................................. 1-3

Presentation Cradle ................................................................................................................. 1-4

Connecting the Cradle ............................................................................................................. 1-4

Changing the Host Interface .................................................................................................... 1-4

Using a DC Power Supply ........................................................................................................ 1-5

Charging the DS2278 Battery ........................................................................................................ 1-5

Charging Using the Cradle ....................................................................................................... 1-5

Charging Using the Micro USB Cable ...................................................................................... 1-6

Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery ........................................................................................ 1-7

Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................................................... 1-7

Removing the Battery .................................................................................................................... 1-8

Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle .................................................................................... 1-9

Sending Data to the Host Computer .............................................................................................. 1-9

ds2278-prg-en.book Page v

vi DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Pairing ...................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Lost Connection to Host ......................................................................................................... 1-10

Configuring the Digital Scanner ................................................................................................... 1-10

Radio Communications ................................................................................................................ 1-10

Accessories .................................................................................................................................. 1-10

Chapter 2: 123Scan and Software Tools

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 2-1

123Scan ......................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Communication with 123Scan .................................................................................................. 2-2

123Scan Requirements ............................................................................................................ 2-2

123Scan Information ................................................................................................................ 2-2

Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos ......................................................................... 2-3

Scanner Control App ...................................................................................................................... 2-4

Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility ...................................................................................................... 2-4

Chapter 3: Data Capture

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Beeper and LED Indications .......................................................................................................... 3-1

Digital Scanner Indications ....................................................................................................... 3-1

Cradle LED Indications ............................................................................................................ 3-5

Scanning ........................................................................................................................................ 3-6

Hand-Held Scanning ................................................................................................................ 3-6

Hands-Free Scanning .............................................................................................................. 3-7

Aiming with Digital Scanner ..................................................................................................... 3-8

Aiming ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8

Decode Ranges ............................................................................................................................. 3-8

Chapter 4: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 4-1

Known Harmful Ingredients ...................................................................................................... 4-1

Approved Cleaners for the Digital Scanner and Cradle ........................................................... 4-2

Cleaning the Digital Scanner .................................................................................................... 4-2

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 4-3

Report Software Version Bar Code .......................................................................................... 4-7

Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................ 4-8

Cradle Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 4-11

Chapter 5: User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 5-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 5-2

Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 5-2

User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ...................................................... 5-2

User Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 5-5

Default Parameters .................................................................................................................. 5-5

Parameter Bar Code Scanning ................................................................................................ 5-6

ds2278-prg-en.book Page vi

Table of Contents vii

Beep After Good Decode ......................................................................................................... 5-6

Beeper Volume ........................................................................................................................ 5-7

Beeper Tone ............................................................................................................................ 5-8

Beeper Duration ....................................................................................................................... 5-9

Suppress Power Up Beeps ...................................................................................................... 5-9

LED on Good Decode ............................................................................................................ 5-10

Direct Decode Indicator .......................................................................................................... 5-10

Low Power Mode ................................................................................................................... 5-11

Time Delay to Low Power Mode ............................................................................................ 5-12

Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim .......................................................................... 5-14

Battery Preservation Mode ..................................................................................................... 5-15

Trigger Mode .......................................................................................................................... 5-16

Hands-Free Mode .................................................................................................................. 5-17

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................ 5-18

Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern ............................................................... 5-19

Picklist Mode .......................................................................................................................... 5-20

Continuous Bar Code Read ................................................................................................... 5-21

Unique Bar Code Reporting ................................................................................................... 5-21

Decode Session Timeout ....................................................................................................... 5-22

Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout ................................................................................... 5-22

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................ 5-23

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ...................................................................... 5-23

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) ............................................................................. 5-24

Mobile Phone/Display Mode .................................................................................................. 5-24

PDF Prioritization ................................................................................................................... 5-25

PDF Prioritization Timeout ..................................................................................................... 5-25

Decoding Illumination ............................................................................................................. 5-26

Illumination Brightness ........................................................................................................... 5-26

Low Light Scene Detection .................................................................................................... 5-27

Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Modes Only) .............................................................. 5-28

Product ID (PID) Type ............................................................................................................ 5-29

Product ID (PID) Value ........................................................................................................... 5-29

ECLevel .................................................................................................................................. 5-30

Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................................ 5-31

Enter Key ............................................................................................................................... 5-31

Tab Key .................................................................................................................................. 5-31

Transmit Code ID Character .................................................................................................. 5-32

Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................................ 5-33

Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................ 5-34

FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................................... 5-36

Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................................ 5-37

Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval ................................................................................................ 5-38

Send Versions .............................................................................................................................. 5-39

Software Version .................................................................................................................... 5-39

Serial Number ........................................................................................................................ 5-39

Manufacturing Information ..................................................................................................... 5-39

Chapter 6: Radio Communications

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

ds2278-prg-en.book Page vii

viii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 6-2

Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 6-2

Radio Communications Parameter Defaults .................................................................................. 6-2

Wireless Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................... 6-5

Radio Communication Host Types ................................................................................................ 6-5

Bluetooth Classic vs. Low Energy Bluetooth ............................................................................ 6-5

Cradle ....................................................................................................................................... 6-5

Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation ................................................................ 6-6

Simple Serial Interface (SSI) .................................................................................................... 6-7

Serial Port Profile (SPP) ........................................................................................................... 6-9

Bluetooth Technology Profile Support ...................................................................................... 6-9

Central/Peripheral Set Up ...................................................................................................... 6-10

Bluetooth Friendly Name ............................................................................................................. 6-10

Discoverable Mode ................................................................................................................ 6-11

Wi-Fi Friendly Mode ..................................................................................................................... 6-12

Notes ...................................................................................................................................... 6-12

Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion .......................................................................................... 6-12

Radio Output Power ..................................................................................................................... 6-14

Link Supervision Timeout ....................................................................................................... 6-15

Bluetooth Radio State .................................................................................................................. 6-16

HID Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 6-16

Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle ....................................................................................... 6-16

HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 6-18

HID CAPS Lock Override ....................................................................................................... 6-18

HID Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................................... 6-19

Emulate Keypad ..................................................................................................................... 6-19

Fast HID Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 6-20

Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 6-20

HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................. 6-21

HID Function Key Mapping .................................................................................................... 6-21

Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 6-22

Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 6-22

Auto-Reconnect Feature .............................................................................................................. 6-23

Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback ...................................................................................... 6-23

Reconnect Attempt Interval .................................................................................................... 6-24

Auto-Reconnect ..................................................................................................................... 6-25

Out of Range Indicator ................................................................................................................. 6-25

Beep on Insertion ......................................................................................................................... 6-26

Beep on <BEL> ............................................................................................................................ 6-26

Digital Scanner To Cradle Support .............................................................................................. 6-27

Pairing .................................................................................................................................... 6-27

Pairing Methods ..................................................................................................................... 6-28

Connection Maintenance Interval ........................................................................................... 6-29

Pairing Using the Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility ........................................................................ 6-31

Pairing Bar Code Format for Serial Port Connections ................................................................. 6-31

Pairing Bar Code Example ..................................................................................................... 6-31

Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................. 6-32

Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................ 6-32

Persistent Batch Storage ............................................................................................................. 6-34

Bluetooth Security ........................................................................................................................ 6-35

ds2278-prg-en.book Page viii

Table of Contents ix

PIN Code ................................................................................................................................ 6-35

Bluetooth Security Levels ....................................................................................................... 6-37

Bluetooth Radio, Linking, and Batch Operation ........................................................................... 6-38

Setting Up an iOS or Android Product To Work With The Digital Scanner ............................ 6-38

Setting Up a Windows Product To Work With The Digital Scanner ....................................... 6-39

Save Bluetooth Connection Information ...................................................................................... 6-40

Virtual Tether ............................................................................................................................... 6-41

Virtual Tether Alarm on the Scanner ...................................................................................... 6-41

Virtual Tether Alarm on the Cradle ......................................................................................... 6-44

Delay Before Virtual Alarm Activates ..................................................................................... 6-44

Virtual Tether Alarm Duration ................................................................................................. 6-45

Defeat Virtual Tether Alarm .................................................................................................... 6-46

Pause Virtual Tether Alarm Duration ..................................................................................... 6-46

Chapter 7: Signature Capture Preferences

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Setting Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 7-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 7-2

Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 7-2

Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults ..................................................................... 7-2

Signature Capture Preferences ..................................................................................................... 7-3

Signature Capture .................................................................................................................... 7-3

Signature Capture File Format Selector ................................................................................... 7-4

Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel .............................................................................................. 7-5

Signature Capture Width .......................................................................................................... 7-6

Signature Capture Height ......................................................................................................... 7-6

Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................. 7-6

Chapter 8: USB Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 8-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 8-1

Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 8-1

Connecting a USB Interface .......................................................................................................... 8-2

USB Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 8-3

USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 8-5

USB Device Type ..................................................................................................................... 8-5

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking .................................................................... 8-7

Native Firmware Update .......................................................................................................... 8-7

USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................................... 8-8

USB CAPS Lock Override ........................................................................................................ 8-8

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters ...................................................................................... 8-9

USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 .......................................................................................... 8-9

USB Fast HID ......................................................................................................................... 8-10

USB Polling Interval ............................................................................................................... 8-11

Keypad Emulation .................................................................................................................. 8-13

Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 8-13

Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero .................................................................................... 8-14

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................ 8-14

ds2278-prg-en.book Page ix

x DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Function Key Mapping ........................................................................................................... 8-15

Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 8-15

Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 8-16

USB Static CDC ..................................................................................................................... 8-16

CDC Beep on <BEL> ............................................................................................................. 8-17

USB CDC Host Variant .......................................................................................................... 8-17

TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep ......................................................................................... 8-19

TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive ........................................................................................... 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive ............................................................. 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version ................................................................................ 8-21

ASCII Character Sets for USB ..................................................................................................... 8-21

Chapter 9: SSI Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 9-1

Communication .............................................................................................................................. 9-1

SSI Transactions ............................................................................................................................ 9-3

General Data Transactions ...................................................................................................... 9-3

Decoded Data Transmission .................................................................................................... 9-4

Communication Summary .............................................................................................................. 9-6

RTS/CTS Lines ........................................................................................................................ 9-6

ACK/NAK Option ...................................................................................................................... 9-6

Number of Data Bits ................................................................................................................. 9-6

Serial Response Timeout ......................................................................................................... 9-6

Retries ...................................................................................................................................... 9-6

Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking ............................. 9-6

Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 9-6

SSI Communication Notes ....................................................................................................... 9-7

Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ............................................................................ 9-7

Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI .............................................................. 9-8

Command Structure ................................................................................................................. 9-8

Response Structure ................................................................................................................. 9-8

Example Transaction ............................................................................................................... 9-9

Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 9-10

Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 9-10

Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 9-10

Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults ................................................................................. 9-11

SSI Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 9-12

Select SSI Host ...................................................................................................................... 9-12

Baud Rate .............................................................................................................................. 9-12

Parity ...................................................................................................................................... 9-14

Check Parity ........................................................................................................................... 9-15

Stop Bits ................................................................................................................................. 9-15

Software Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 9-16

Host RTS Line State .............................................................................................................. 9-17

Decode Data Packet Format .................................................................................................. 9-17

Host Serial Response Timeout .............................................................................................. 9-18

Host Character Timeout ......................................................................................................... 9-19

Multipacket Option ................................................................................................................. 9-20

Interpacket Delay ................................................................................................................... 9-21

Event Reporting ........................................................................................................................... 9-22

ds2278-prg-en.book Page x

Table of Contents xi

Decode Event ......................................................................................................................... 9-22

Boot Up Event ........................................................................................................................ 9-23

Parameter Event .................................................................................................................... 9-23

Chapter 10: RS-232 Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 10-1

Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 10-1

Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 10-2

Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 10-2

Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................................. 10-2

RS-232 Parameter Defaults ......................................................................................................... 10-3

RS-232 Host Parameters ............................................................................................................. 10-4

RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................................ 10-6

Baud Rate .............................................................................................................................. 10-8

Parity ...................................................................................................................................... 10-9

Stop Bits ................................................................................................................................. 10-9

Data Bits ............................................................................................................................... 10-10

Check Receive Errors .......................................................................................................... 10-10

Hardware Handshaking ........................................................................................................ 10-11

Software Handshaking ......................................................................................................... 10-13

Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................ 10-15

RTS Line State ..................................................................................................................... 10-16

Beep on <BEL> .................................................................................................................... 10-16

Intercharacter Delay ............................................................................................................. 10-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ................................................................................................... 10-18

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters .................................................................................. 10-18

ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ................................................................................................ 10-18

Chapter 11: IBM 468X / 469X Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 11-1

Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 11-1

Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 11-1

Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 11-2

Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................................... 11-2

IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................................... 11-3

IBM Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 11-4

Port Address .......................................................................................................................... 11-4

Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................................ 11-5

RS-485 Beep Directive ........................................................................................................... 11-5

RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive ............................................................................. 11-6

IBM-485 Specification Version ............................................................................................... 11-6

Chapter 12: Keyboard Wedge Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 12-1

Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 12-1

Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 12-1

Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 12-1

Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface .................................................................................... 12-2

Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults ......................................................................................... 12-3

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xi

xii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters ............................................................................................. 12-4

Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................................ 12-4

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters .................................................................................... 12-4

Keystroke Delay ..................................................................................................................... 12-5

Intra-keystroke Delay ............................................................................................................. 12-5

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation .................................................................................... 12-6

Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 12-6

Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 12-7

Caps Lock Override ............................................................................................................... 12-7

Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 12-8

Function Key Mapping ........................................................................................................... 12-8

FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................................... 12-9

Send Make and Break ............................................................................................................ 12-9

Keyboard Map ............................................................................................................................ 12-10

ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................................ 12-10

Chapter 13: Symbologies

Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 13-1

Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 13-1

Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 13-2

Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 13-2

Symbology Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................... 13-2

Enable/Disable All Code Types ................................................................................................... 13-8

UPC/EAN/JAN ............................................................................................................................. 13-9

UPC-A .................................................................................................................................... 13-9

UPC-E .................................................................................................................................... 13-9

UPC-E1 ................................................................................................................................ 13-10

EAN-8/JAN-8 ........................................................................................................................ 13-10

EAN-13/JAN-13 .................................................................................................................... 13-11

Bookland EAN ...................................................................................................................... 13-11

Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................................ 13-12

ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................................ 13-12

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals ............................................................................... 13-13

User-Programmable Supplementals .................................................................................... 13-16

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ......................................................................... 13-16

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ...................................................................... 13-17

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................ 13-18

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................ 13-18

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit .............................................................................................. 13-19

Transmit EAN-8 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 13-19

Transmit EAN-13 Check Digit .............................................................................................. 13-20

UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................................. 13-21

UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................................. 13-22

UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................ 13-23

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A .................................................................................................... 13-24

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A .................................................................................................. 13-24

EAN/JAN Zero Extend ......................................................................................................... 13-25

UCC Coupon Extended Code .............................................................................................. 13-25

Coupon Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-26

UPC Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................... 13-26

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xii

Table of Contents xiii

Code 128 ................................................................................................................................... 13-27

Set Lengths for Code 128 .................................................................................................... 13-27

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ...................................................................................... 13-28

ISBT 128 .............................................................................................................................. 13-29

ISBT Concatenation ............................................................................................................. 13-30

Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................................ 13-31

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................................ 13-31

Code 128 <FNC4> ............................................................................................................... 13-32

Code 128 Security Level ...................................................................................................... 13-32

Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone ........................................................................................... 13-33

Code 39 ..................................................................................................................................... 13-34

Trioptic Code 39 ................................................................................................................... 13-34

Convert Code 39 to Code 32 ............................................................................................... 13-35

Code 32 Prefix ..................................................................................................................... 13-35

Set Lengths for Code 39 ...................................................................................................... 13-36

Code 39 Check Digit Verification ......................................................................................... 13-37

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ............................................................................................. 13-38

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion ........................................................................................... 13-38

Code 39 Security Level ........................................................................................................ 13-39

Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone ............................................................................................. 13-41

Code 93 ..................................................................................................................................... 13-41

Set Lengths for Code 93 ...................................................................................................... 13-42

Code 11 ..................................................................................................................................... 13-44

Set Lengths for Code 11 ...................................................................................................... 13-44

Code 11 Check Digit Verification ......................................................................................... 13-46

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits ........................................................................................... 13-47

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5) .................................................................................................. 13-47

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................ 13-48

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 13-50

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 13-51

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ................................................................................................... 13-51

Febraban .............................................................................................................................. 13-52

I 2 of 5 Security Level ........................................................................................................... 13-53

I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................ 13-54

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5) .................................................................................................... 13-54

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................................. 13-55

Codabar (NW - 7) ....................................................................................................................... 13-57

Set Lengths for Codabar ...................................................................................................... 13-57

CLSI Editing ......................................................................................................................... 13-59

NOTIS Editing ...................................................................................................................... 13-59

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters ......................................................... 13-60

Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 13-60

Transmit Codabar Check Digit ............................................................................................. 13-61

MSI ............................................................................................................................................. 13-61

Set Lengths for MSI ............................................................................................................. 13-62

MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................................. 13-64

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................................ 13-64

MSI Check Digit Algorithm ................................................................................................... 13-65

MSI Reduced Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................... 13-65

Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................ 13-66

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xiii

xiv DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Matrix 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 13-66

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 13-67

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ...................................................................................................... 13-68

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ....................................................................................... 13-69

Korean 3 of 5 ............................................................................................................................. 13-69

Inverse 1D .................................................................................................................................. 13-70

GS1 DataBar .............................................................................................................................. 13-71

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar

Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ............................................................................. 13-71

GS1 DataBar Limited ........................................................................................................... 13-71

GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ................................................ 13-72

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN ............................................................................. 13-72

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check .................................................................................... 13-73

GS1 DataBar Security Level ................................................................................................ 13-74

Symbology-Specific Security Features ...................................................................................... 13-75

Redundancy Level ............................................................................................................... 13-75

Security Level ....................................................................................................................... 13-77

1D Quiet Zone Level ............................................................................................................ 13-78

Intercharacter Gap Size ....................................................................................................... 13-79

Composite .................................................................................................................................. 13-79

Composite CC-C .................................................................................................................. 13-79

Composite CC-A/B ............................................................................................................... 13-80

Composite TLC-39 ............................................................................................................... 13-80

Composite Inverse ............................................................................................................... 13-81

UPC Composite Mode ......................................................................................................... 13-82

Composite Beep Mode ......................................................................................................... 13-83

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................................ 13-83

2D Symbologies ......................................................................................................................... 13-84

PDF417 ................................................................................................................................ 13-84

MicroPDF417 ....................................................................................................................... 13-84

Code 128 Emulation ............................................................................................................. 13-85

Data Matrix ........................................................................................................................... 13-86

GS1 Data Matrix ................................................................................................................... 13-86

Data Matrix Inverse .............................................................................................................. 13-87

Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images ...................................................................................... 13-88

Maxicode .............................................................................................................................. 13-89

QR Code .............................................................................................................................. 13-89

GS1 QR ............................................................................................................................... 13-90

MicroQR ............................................................................................................................... 13-90

Weblink QR .......................................................................................................................... 13-91

Linked QR ............................................................................................................................ 13-92

Aztec .................................................................................................................................... 13-93

Aztec Inverse ....................................................................................................................... 13-93

Han Xin ................................................................................................................................ 13-94

Han Xin Inverse .................................................................................................................... 13-94

Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................ 13-95

Grid Matrix Inverse ............................................................................................................... 13-95

Grid Matrix Mirror ................................................................................................................. 13-96

DotCode ............................................................................................................................... 13-97

DotCode Inverse .................................................................................................................. 13-98

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xiv

Table of Contents xv

DotCode Mirrored ................................................................................................................. 13-99

DotCode Prioritize .............................................................................................................. 13-100

DotCode Erasure Limit ....................................................................................................... 13-100

Escape Characters ............................................................................................................. 13-101

Flush Macro PDF Buffer ..................................................................................................... 13-101

Abort Macro PDF Entry ...................................................................................................... 13-101

Postal Codes ............................................................................................................................ 13-102

US Postnet ......................................................................................................................... 13-102

US Planet ........................................................................................................................... 13-102

Transmit US Postal Check Digit ......................................................................................... 13-103

UK Postal ........................................................................................................................... 13-103

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit ......................................................................................... 13-104

Japan Postal ...................................................................................................................... 13-104

Australia Post ..................................................................................................................... 13-105

Australia Post Format ......................................................................................................... 13-106

Netherlands KIX Code ...................................................................................................... 13-107

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ................................................................................ 13-107

UPU FICS Postal ............................................................................................................... 13-108

Mailmark ............................................................................................................................. 13-108

Chapter 14: Data Formatting: ADF

Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 14-1

Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................ 14-1

Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters

Appendix B: Country Codes

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... B-1

USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ....................................... B-2

Appendix C: Country Code Pages

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... C-1

Country Code Page Defaults ........................................................................................................ C-1

Country Code Page Bar Codes .................................................................................................... C-5

Appendix D: CJK Decode Control

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... D-1

CJK Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... D-1

Unicode Output Control ........................................................................................................... D-1

CJK Output Method to Windows Host ..................................................................................... D-2

Non-CJK UTF Bar Code Output .............................................................................................. D-4

Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host .......................................................................... D-5

Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output .................................. D-5

Adding CJK IME on Windows ................................................................................................. D-5

Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host ................................................... D-6

Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host .................................................. D-7

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xv

xvi DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Appendix E: Programming Reference

Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ E-1

AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................................... E-3

Appendix F: Sample Bar Codes

UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................................... F-1

UPC-A, 100% ........................................................................................................................... F-1

UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-1

UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-2

UPC-E ...................................................................................................................................... F-2

UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-2

UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-3

EAN-8 ....................................................................................................................................... F-3

EAN-13, 100% ......................................................................................................................... F-3

EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... F-4

EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... F-4

Code 128 ....................................................................................................................................... F-5

GS1-128 ................................................................................................................................... F-5

Code 39 ......................................................................................................................................... F-5

Code 93 ......................................................................................................................................... F-6

Code 11 with 2 Check Digits .......................................................................................................... F-6

Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................................................... F-6

MSI with 2 Check Digits ................................................................................................................. F-7

Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ F-7

Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................... F-7

Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................. F-8

GS1 DataBar .................................................................................................................................. F-8

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ...................................................... F-8

GS1 DataBar Truncated ........................................................................................................... F-8

GS1 DataBar Stacked .............................................................................................................. F-9

GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional .................................................................................... F-9

GS1 DataBar Limited ............................................................................................................... F-9

GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................................... F-10

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ........................................................................................... F-10

2D Symbologies ........................................................................................................................... F-11

PDF417 .................................................................................................................................. F-11

Data Matrix ............................................................................................................................. F-11

GS1 Data Matrix ..................................................................................................................... F-11

Maxicode ................................................................................................................................ F-12

QR Code ................................................................................................................................ F-12

GS1 QR .................................................................................................................................. F-12

MicroQR ................................................................................................................................. F-13

Aztec ...................................................................................................................................... F-13

Grid Matrix .............................................................................................................................. F-13

Han Xin .................................................................................................................................. F-14

Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................ F-14

US Postnet ............................................................................................................................. F-14

UK Postal ............................................................................................................................... F-14

Japan Post ............................................................................................................................. F-15

Australian Post ....................................................................................................................... F-15

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xvi

Table of Contents xvii

Appendix G: Numeric Bar Codes

Numeric Bar Codes ....................................................................................................................... G-1

Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... G-3

Appendix H: Alphaumeric Bar Codes

Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... H-1

Alphanumeric Bar Codes .............................................................................................................. H-2

Appendix I: ASCII Character Sets

Appendix J: Communication Protocol Functionality

Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface ...................................................... J-1

Appendix K: Signature Capture Code

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... K-1

Code Structure .............................................................................................................................. K-1

Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................................... K-1

CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................................... K-2

Start / Stop Patterns ...................................................................................................................... K-2

Dimensions ................................................................................................................................... K-3

Data Format .................................................................................................................................. K-3

Additional Capabilities ................................................................................................................... K-4

Signature Boxes ............................................................................................................................ K-4

Appendix L: Non-Parameter Attributes

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... L-1

Attributes ........................................................................................................................................ L-1

Model Number .......................................................................................................................... L-1

Serial Number .......................................................................................................................... L-1

Date of Manufacture ................................................................................................................. L-2

Date of First Programming ....................................................................................................... L-2

Configuration Filename ............................................................................................................ L-2

Beeper/LED .............................................................................................................................. L-3

Parameter Defaults .................................................................................................................. L-4

Beep on Next Bootup ............................................................................................................... L-4

Reboot ...................................................................................................................................... L-4

Host Trigger Session ................................................................................................................ L-4

Firmware Version ..................................................................................................................... L-5

ImageKit Version ...................................................................................................................... L-5

In Cradle Detect ....................................................................................................................... L-5

Charging ................................................................................................................................... L-5

Battery Charge State ................................................................................................................ L-6

Appendix M: FIRMWARE UPGRADES USING iOS

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... M-1

Downloading Firmware Using the Zebra Scanner Control Application ......................................... M-1

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xvii

xviii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Appendix N: UPGRADING OVER BLUETOOTH WITHOUT A CRADLE

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... N-1

Upgrading Without a Cradle .......................................................................................................... N-1

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ N-2

Index

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xviii

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Introduction

The DS2278 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and

troubleshooting the DS2278 series digital scanner.

Configurations

This guide includes the DS2278 series digital scanner configurations listed in Table A.

Table A:

Digital Scanner and Cradle Configurations

Model Configuration Description

DS2278-SR00006ZZWW DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Nova White

DS2278-SR00007ZZWW DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Twilight Black

DS2278-SR00007ZZY DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Twilight Black - India only

CR2278-PC10004WW DS2278: Presentation Cradle, Bluetooth, Midnight Black

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xix

xx DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Related Documents

•

DS2278 Series Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-002916-xx - provides general information for getting started with

the DS2278 digital scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.

•

Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx - provides information on ADF, a means of

customizing data before transmission to a host.

•

Attribute Data Dictionary, p/n 72E-149786-xx defines attribute numbers (device configuration parameters,

monitored data, and born-on information) and describes management of various attribute domains for bar

code scanners and OEM engines.

For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: www.zebra.com/support

Service Information

If you have a problem using the equipment, contact your facility's technical or systems support. If there is a

problem with the equipment, they will contact the Zebra Support & Downloads website at: www.zebra.com/support.

When contacting support, please have the following information available:

•

Serial number of the unit

•

Model number or product name

•

Software type and version number

Zebra responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements.

If your problem cannot be solved by support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given

specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping

container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.

If you purchased your business product from a Zebra business partner, please contact that business partner for

support.

Provide Documentation Feedback

If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about this guide, send an email to EVM-T[email protected].

*Baud Rate 9600

Feature/Option

* Indicates Default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page xxii

CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED

Introduction

2D bar codes have made their way to the Point of Sale (POS), appearing on everything from customer purchased

items to printed and electronic coupons and loyalty cards. 1D scanners cannot capture the new 2D codes, leading

to exceptions that slow down the check-out process. The DS2278 digital imager scanner scans both 1D and 2D

bar codes and does not compromise performance or features.

The DS2278 is easy to deploy, easy to use, and easy to manage - delivering affordable simplicity with its

hands-free/hand-held design.

Figure 1-1 DS2278 Digital Scanner

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

1 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Interfaces

The DS2278 digital scanner cradle supports:

• USB connection to a host. The digital scanner automatically detects the USB host interface type and uses

the default setting (USB Keyboard HID). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another

USB interface type by scanning programming bar code menus. See Appendix B, Country Codes for the

interface supported international keyboards (for Windows® environment).

• Standard RS-232 connection to a host. The digital scanner automatically detects the RS-232 host interface

type and uses the default setting (Standard RS-232). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements,

select another RS-232 interface type by scanning programming bar code menus.

• Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. The digital scanner automatically detects the IBM host interface type

but does not select a default setting. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner

with the IBM terminal.

• Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. The digital scanner

automatically detects the Keyboard Wedge host interface type and uses the default setting (IBM AT

Notebook). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on

page 12-4. See Appendix B, Country Codes for the interface supported international keyboards (for

Windows® environment).

• Configuration via 123Scan.

Unpacking

Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the digital scanner was damaged in

transit, contact support. See page xxii for information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container;

use this to return the equipment for servicing.

NOTE For a list of supported digital scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J,

Communication Protocol Functionality.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Getting Started 1 - 3

DS2278 Features

Figure 1-2 Digital Scanner Features

For detailed LED indicator information see Beeper and LED Indications on page 3-1.

Cradle Features

The CR2278-PC cordless presentation cradle serves as a charger, radio communication interface, and host

communication interface for the DS2278 cordless digital scanner.

The presentation cradle sits on a desktop and charges the DS2278 cordless digital scanner while allowing bar

code scanning in presentation mode. This cradle also provides host communication by receiving digital scanner

data via a Bluetooth radio, and sending that data to the host through an attached cable. The cable provides power

to the cradle from the host or optional power supply if supported.

For more information about communication between the digital scanner, cradle, and host, see Chapter 6, Radio

Communications.

IMPORTANT DO NOT use the CR2278-PC cradle with any scanners other than the DS2278 digital scanner.

No other cradles are compatible with the DS2278.

DO NOT use the DS2278 digital scanner with any cradles other than the CR2278-PC cradle. No

other scanners are compatible with the CR2278-PC cradle.

Beeper

Scan LEDs

Trigger

Scan Window

Battery

Compartment

Screw

Charging

Contacts

Battery

Compartment

Cover

Micro USB

Port

NOTE For detailed information about connecting, using, and mounting the CR2278-PC cradle refer to the

documentation included with the cradle (CR2278-PC Presentation Cradle Quick Reference

Guide, p/n MN-002917xx).

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

1 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Presentation Cradle

Figure 1-3 CR2278-PC (Presentation Cradle) -Top and Bottom Views

Connecting the Cradle

Via Host Connection (for Charging and Communication)

1. Connect the appropriate cable to the power supply and an AC power source, if necessary. This ensures

detection of the host and prevents inadvertently back powering the cradle from improper detection of the host.

2. Insert the interface cable into the host port.

3. Insert the interface cable into the cradle's host port.

4. Pair the digital scanner to the cradle either by inserting it in the cradle (if Pair on Contacts is enabled) or by

scanning the pairing bar code.

5. If necessary, scan the appropriate host bar code (for non-autodetected interfaces).

Via Wall Outlet Using a Power Adapter (for Charging Only)

1. Connect the appropriate cable to the power supply and an AC power source.

2. Insert the interface cable into the cradle's host port.

3. Pair the digital scanner directly to the host device (PC, Smartphone, or Tablet).

Changing the Host Interface

To connect to a different host, or to the same host through a different cable:

1. Unplug the interface cable from the host.

2. Unplug the power supply from the host cable, if required.

3. Connect the interface cable to the new host, or the new interface cable to the existing host.

4. Reconnect the power supply, if required.

5. If necessary, scan the appropriate host bar code (for non-autodetected interfaces).

Charging /

Communications

Contacts

Pairing Bar

Code (in back)

Rubber

Feet

Rubber

Feet

Interface Port

Station Mount

Threaded Brass

Screw Holes

(2 - M4 x 5 mm)

LED Indicator

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Getting Started 1 - 5

Using a DC Power Supply

There is no separate power jack on the cradle. The cradle can operate from host supplied power, if available. If

host power is limited or not available, an external DC power supply can be used with certain host interface cables

that support a power jack. An external power supply is recommended if fastest charging is required. See host

interface chapters for connections.

Charging the DS2278 Battery

When using a new battery in the DS2278, the battery may require a charge to be enabled. See Charging the

DS2278 Battery on page 1-5.

Charging Using the Cradle

Insert the battery in the DS2278 and place the DS2278 in the CR2278-PC cradle (see Inserting the Digital Scanner

in the Cradle on page 1-9). The digital scanner boots and the cradle LED begins flashing green to indicate the start

of normal charging.

See Beeper and LED Indications on page 3-1 for detailed LED indicator information.

CAUTION Always disconnect the DC power supply BEFORE disconnecting the cable to the host end or the

cradle may not recognize the new host.

NOTES 1. It is recommended to fully charge the battery before first use.

2. Charge time depends on the host type and power source.

3. The CR2278-PC passes 5V to the digital scanner which charges the battery. The charging system on

the DS2278 charges the battery with as much current as possible based on the power source of the

CR2278-PC. This way the input power source is never overloaded and the charge time is made as

short as possible. Charge times lengthen as scanning activity increases when a DS2278 operates in

presentation mode on a CR2278-PC cradle. To optimize charge performance, ensure the digital

scanner is oriented to minimize accidental scan activation.

CAUTION The battery does not charge when the temperature is above 40°C (104°F). When scanning in

presentation mode at temperatures above 40°C (104°F), the battery drains until the temperature drops.

When the battery charge is consumed the digital scanner stops scanning until the temperature drops

and the battery has sufficient time to charge.

To avoid temperature related faults, charge the battery and operate the DS2278 in presentation mode

on a CR2278-PC only within the recommended 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) range, and ideally within

5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F).

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

1 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Charging Using the Micro USB Cable

The Micro USB cable is a charge only cable.

Figure 1-4 Micro USB Connections

Connect the Micro USB connector to the DS2278. Connect the standard USB connector to a PC or a USB wall

outlet. The digital scanner enumerates as a CDC device when the USB connector is plugged into a PC host. When

charging begins, the digital scanner LED begins flashing green to indicate the start of normal charging.

Converting a CDC Device to HID

The digital scanner enumerates over USB as a CDC device, by default. If your host does not have a CDC driver, a

delay occurs between connecting the digital scanner to the host and the start of charging. To eliminate the delay

scan HID Device Conversion below to enumerate as an HID device. This allows the scanner to begin charging

sooner.

To switch the digital scanner back to a CDC device, scan Scanner as CDC Device below.

For instructions on downloading CDC drivers see page 8-6.

NOTE For best performance, we recommend using Zebra accessories.

HID Device Conversion

*Scanner as CDC Device

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Getting Started 1 - 7

Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery

Scan the Battery Off bar code below to shut off the battery for long term storage or shipping. Pull the digital

scanner trigger to turn on the battery.

Battery Off

Inserting the Battery

Figure 1-5 Inserting the Battery

To insert the battery into the digital scanner:

1. Insert the battery into the battery compartment and push down.

2. Turn the screw on the battery compartment clockwise to tighten. Do not over torque the screw.

NOTE Always scan the Battery Off bar code in hand-held mode. Also see Battery Preservation Mode on page

5-15 for additional battery features.

NOTES

It is recommended to fully charge the battery before first use.

2. The battery is initially shipped inside the digital scanner. Inserting a battery would only be

applicable for a replacement battery.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

1 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Removing the Battery

Figure 1-6 Removing the Battery from the Digital Scanner

To remove the battery from the digital scanner:

1. Turn the screw on the battery compartment counterclockwise to remove the screw.

2. Remove the battery from the battery compartment.

3. To replace the battery, see Inserting the Battery on page 1-7.

IMPORTANT When replacing the battery, wait at least 5 seconds after removing the old battery before

inserting the new battery.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Getting Started 1 - 9

Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle

To insert the digital scanner in the CR2278-PC cradle:

1. Insert the digital scanner straight down into the cradle top.

2. The digital scanner naturally rotates forward to engage the digital scanner contacts with the cradle contacts

Figure 1-7 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the CR2278-PC Cradle

Sending Data to the Host Computer

The cradle receives data from the digital scanner via a wireless radio connection and transmits it to the host

computer via the host cable. The digital scanner and cradle must be paired for successful wireless communication.

Pairing

Pairing registers a digital scanner to the cradle such that the digital scanner and cradle can exchange information.

Pair the digital scanner to the cradle either by inserting it in the cradle (if pair on contacts is enabled), or by

scanning the pairing bar code.

To pair the digital scanner with the cradle, insert the digital scanner in the cradle or scan the pairing bar code.

(Pairing on insertion into the cradle is enabled by default. See Pairing Methods on page 6-28.)

NOTE The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle.

Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

1 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Lost Connection to Host

If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle's host, ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power

supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet, if applicable. If scanned data still does not transmit to the host,

reestablish a connection with the host:

1. Disconnect the power supply from the cradle.

2. Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle.

3. Wait three seconds.

4. Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle.

5. Reconnect the power supply to the cradle, if the host requires.

6. Reestablish pairing with the cradle by inserting the digital scanner in the cradle or scan the pairing bar code.

(Pairing on insertion into the cradle is enabled by default. See Pairing Methods on page 6-28.)

Configuring the Digital Scanner

Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan

configuration program to configure the digital scanner. See

Chapter 5, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options and each host chapter for information about programming

the digital scanner using bar code menus. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software Tools to configure the digital

scanner using this configuration program. 123Scan includes a help file.

Radio Communications

The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth, or by pairing with a cradle. For radio

communication parameters, detailed information about operational modes, Bluetooth and pairing, see Chapter 6,

Radio Communications.

Accessories

The digital scanner ships with the battery installed and the DS2278 Quick Start Guide. The following accessories

must be ordered separately:

• Cradle: Can be used for charging the digital scanner battery and host communication (see Presentation

Cradle on page 1-4).

• Micro USB cable: Can be used for charging the battery in the digital scanner, without a cradle.

• Replacement battery for the DS2278 digital scanner, if needed.

• Interface cable for the appropriate interface.

• Power supply, if the interface requires one.

See Related Product Line Configurations on page xx for the full list of accessories. Also see Configurations on

page xix for product and cradle configurations. For additional items, contact a local Zebra representative or

business partner.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

CHAPTER 2 123SCAN AND

SOFTWARE TOOLS

Introduction

This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.

123Scan

123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more.

Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process.

Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming bar code for scanning,

emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable.

Through 123Scan a user can accomplish the following.

• Configure a scanner using a wizard.

• Program the following scanner settings:

• Beeper tone / volume settings.

• Enable / disable symbologies.

• Communication settings.

• Modify data before transmission to a host using:

• Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one bar code per trigger pull.

• Load parameter settings to a scanner via:

• Bar code scanning.

• Scan a paper bar code.

• Scan a bar code from a PC screen.

• Scan a bar code from a smart phone screen.

• Download over a USB cable:

• Load settings to one scanner.

• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

2 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

• Validate scanner setup:

• View scanned data within the utility's Data View screen.

• Review settings using the Parameter Report.

• Clone settings from an already deployed scanner from the start screen.

• Upgrade scanner firmware:

• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).

• Upgrade firmware

• Over a USB cable

• Over a Bluetooth connection (no cradle required)

• View statistics such as:

• Asset tracking information.

• Time and usage information.

• Bar codes scanned by symbology.

• Generate the following reports:

• Bar Code Report - Programming bar code, included parameter settings, and supported scanner models.

• Parameter Report - Lists parameters programmed within a configuration file.

• Inventory Report - Lists scanner asset tracking information.

• Validation Report - Printout of scanned data from the Data view.

• Statistics Report - Lists all statistics retrieved from the scanner.

For more information go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan

Communication with 123Scan

Use a USB cable to connect the scanner to a Windows host computer running 123Scan.

123Scan Requirements

• Host computer with Windows 7, 8, or 10

• Scanner

123Scan Information

For more information on123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan.

For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos

To see a list of all of our free software tools, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftware

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

123Scan and Software Tools 2 - 3

Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos

To tackle all scanner programming needs, use Zebra’s diversified set of software tools. Whether staging a device

or developing a fully featured application with image and data capture, as well as asset management, these tools

help you every step of the way. To download any of the following free tools, go to:

www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.

• 123Scan configuration utility

• SDKs

• Scanner SDK for Windows

• Scanner SDK for Linux

• Scanner SDK for Android

• Scanner SDK for iOS

• Drivers

• OPOS driver

• JPOS driver

• USB CDC driver

• TWAIN driver

• Scanner Management Service (SMS) for Remote Management

• Windows

• Linux

• Mobile Apps

• Scanner Control App

• Android

• iOS

• Zebra AppGallery

• Scan-To-Connect Utility

• Android

• Windows

• How-To-Videos

NOTE For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see

Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

2 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanner Control App

The Scanner Control App (SCA) allows you to control a Bluetooth scanner from a phone or tablet without a cradle.

Use this app to showcase Zebra Bluetooth scanner capabilities and ease of control right from your phone.

The Scanner Control App supports Scan-To-Connect technology for one-step Bluetooth pairing and allows you to

control the following scanner functions:

• Program the beeper and LEDs

• Enable and disable symbologies

• Remotely trigger a scan

The app displays scanned bar code data, and can query scanner asset information and battery health statistics.

The Scanner Control App also works with USB connected scanners like the MP7000, assuming your Android tablet

has a powered USB host port.

The Scanner Control app is available on the Android Play, iOS App, and Zebra AppGallery stores. Source code is

available within the Zebra Scanner SDK for Android and iOS.

To watch a 1 minute tour of the Scanner Control App, go to: www.zebra.com/scannercontrolapp

Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility

In one step, connect a Zebra Bluetooth scanner to a phone, tablet or PC by simply scanning an STC bar code.

Available as a standalone utility for Windows and Android operating systems from www.zebra.com/scantoconnect.

Source code is also available for easy app integration.

NOTE The STC utility allows you to pair a Bluetooth scanner to a phone, tablet or PC without using a cradle.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

CHAPTER 3 DATA CAPTURE

Introduction

This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions

and tips about scanning, and decode ranges.

Beeper and LED Indications

The digital scanner issues different beep sequences/patterns and an LED display to indicate status. Table 3-1

defines beep sequences/patterns and LED displays which occur during both normal scanning and while

programming the digital scanner.

Digital Scanner Indications

Table 3-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications

Beeper Sequence LED Indication

Standard Use

Low/medium/high beeps Green Power up.

Scanning

None Green solid Presentation Mode on.

None No LED; green LED is

turned off

Presentation Mode off.

Medium beep

(or as configured)

Green flash A bar code was successfully decoded. (See

User

Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter

Defaults on page 5-2

for programming beeper sounds.)

Low/low/low/extra low

beeps

Red Parity error.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

3 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Four long low beeps Red A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol.

The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly

configured. Check option setting.

Five long low beeps Red Conversion or format error.

None Red (fast blink)) on

trigger pull

Digital scanner is disabled by a host command to the

digital scanner.

High None A <BEL> character is received over RS-232.

None Single green flash Scanner dock in the cradle.

Wireless Operation

Low, high, low, high Red Out of batch storage memory, unable to store new bar

code.

Radio Indications

Low None Digital scanner inserted into a cradle (may be disabled).

Low, high Green Bluetooth connection established.

High, low Red Bluetooth disconnection event.

Long low, long high Red Bluetooth page timeout; remote device is out of

range/not powered.

Long low, long high, long

low, long high

None Bluetooth connection attempt was rejected by remote

device.

None Green (fast blink) Bluetooth attempting reconnection.

Five high Green (fast blink) Bluetooth attempting reconnection (default is disable).

None Green (fast blink) Digital scanner placed into limited discoverable mode.

High, Low, High, Low Green Pairing bar code scanned.

Battery Indications

Four short high beeps Red (stays on for 4

seconds)

Low battery indication (on trigger release).

None Solid green Digital scanner is charging.

None Red (solid) Digital scanner charging error occurred.

Battery Indications - Micro USB Only

None Green (fast continuous

blink)

Digital scanner is charging.

None Green (solid) Digital scanner is fully charged.

None Single green flash Initial connection.

None Red (solid) Charge error.

Table 3-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)

Beeper Sequence LED Indication

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Data Capture 3 - 3

Parameter Programming

Long low/long high beeps Red Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned,

wrong entry, incorrect bar code programming

sequence; remain in program mode.

High/low beeps Green Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar

code keypad.

High/low/high/low beeps Green Successful program exit with change in the parameter

setting.

ADF Programming

Low/high/low beeps None ADF transmit error.

High/low beeps Green Number expected. Enter another digit. Add leading

zeros to the front if necessary.

Low/low beeps Green Alpha expected. Enter another alphabetic character or

scan the End of Message bar code.

High/high beeps Green blinking ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criteria

or action or scan the Save Rule bar code.

High/low/low beeps Green All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue

entering rule.

High/low/high/low beeps Green

(turns off blinking)

Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.

Long low/long high beeps Red Rule error. Entry error, wrong bar code scanned, or

criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criteria

or action.

Low beep Green Deleted last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.

Low/high/high beeps Green All rules deleted.

Long low/long high/long

low/long high beeps

Red Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try

to save rule again.

Long low/long high/long low

beeps

Green

(turns off blinking)

Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of

an error or the user asked to exit rule entry.

Macro PDF

Two low beeps None File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF

sequence was scanned.

Two long low beeps None File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF

sequence was scanned.

Three long low beeps None Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to

store the current MPDF symbol.

Table 3-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)

Beeper Sequence LED Indication

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

3 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Four long low beeps None Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a

MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in

an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or

illegal MPDF field.

Five long low beeps None Flushing MPDF buffer.

Fast warble beep None Aborting MPDF sequence.

Low/high beeps None Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.

Host Specific

USB only

Four high beeps None

Digital

scanner has not completed initialization. Wait

several seconds and scan again.

RS-232 only

High/high/high/low beeps Red RS-232 receive error.

High beep None A <BEL> character is received when Beep on <BEL> is

enabled.

Host Controlled Digital Scanner LEDs

None Green (slow blink) Digital scanner connected to 123Scan.

None Red (fast blink) File being transferred to the digital scanner (parameters

and firmware).

None Red (slow blink) Firmware being activated on the digital scanner, loaded

into memory.

None Green (solid) Programming completed successfully (parameters and

firmware).

None Red (blink) Loading the SMS package to the digital scanner.

None Red (solid) Error state.

Table 3-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)

Beeper Sequence LED Indication

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Data Capture 3 - 5

Cradle LED Indications

Table 3-3 lists the conditions in which the specified host controls the System Indicator LED.

Table 3-2 Cradle LED Indications

LED Indication

Standard Use

Green (solid) Power up.

Green (off, then on) Bluetooth connection established.

Red (blink) Transmission error.

Charging

Amber (blink) Charging.

Green (solid) Fully charged.

Amber (fast blink) Charging error.

Maintenance

Red (solid) Enter boot loader.

Red (blink) Firmware installation.

Table 3-3 Host Controlled Cradle LED Indications

LED Indication

123Scan

Slow Blinking Green Digital scanner connected to 123Scan.

Fast Blinking Red File being transferred to the digital scanner (parameters and firmware).

Slow Blinking Red Firmware activated on the digital scanner, loaded into memory.

Solid Green Programming completed successfully (parameters and firmware).

Solid Red Error state.

SMS

Blinking Red

(Both digital scanner and cradle)

Loading the SMS package to digital scanner.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

3 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning

Hand-Held Scanning

1. Place the aiming pattern over the bar code.

Figure 3-1 Aiming Pattern on Bar Code - Hand-Held Mode

2. Press and hold the trigger until either:

a. The digital scanner reads the bar code. The digital scanner beeps, the LED flashes, and the scan line turns

off.

b. The digital scanner does not read the bar code and the scan line turns off.

3. Release the trigger.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Data Capture 3 - 7

Hands-Free Scanning

The digital scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it sits in the CR2278-PC cradle. During idle

conditions the digital scanner operates in object detection mode, where it automatically wakes up to decode a bar

code presented in the field of view. In object detection mode it is normal for the illumination LEDs to be dimly lit.

To scan:

1. Ensure all connections are secure (see appropriate host chapter).

2. Present the bar code in the digital scanner field of view.

3. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green. (For more information about

beeper and LED definitions, Beeper and LED Indications on page 3-1).

Figure 3-2 Aiming Pattern on Bar Code - Hands-Free Mode

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

3 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Aiming with Digital Scanner

Aiming

When scanning, the digital scanner projects a red scan line which allows positioning the bar code within its field of

view, omnidirectionally. See Decode Ranges on page 3-8 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital

scanner and a bar code.

Figure 3-3 Scanning Orientation with Aiming Line

The aiming line is smaller when the digital scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the

symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the digital scanner, and those with larger

bars or elements (mil size) farther from the digital scanner.

The digital scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the bar code. For more information see Table 3-1

on page 3-1.

Decode Ranges

012345

Table 3-4 DS2278 Typical Decode Ranges

Bar Code Type Symbol Density

DS2278

Typical Working Ranges

Near

(in/cm)

Far

(in/cm)

Code 39 5 mil .2 in/.5 cm 6.0 in/15.2 cm

Code 39 10 mil .0 in/.0 cm 13.0 in/33.0 cm

Code 128 5 mil .6 in/1.5 cm 4.0 in/10.1 cm

Code 128 7.5 mil .0 in/.0 cm 7.0 in/17.8 cm

PDF417 6.7 mil .8 in/2.0 cm 5.7 in/14.5 cm

UPC 13 mil (100%) .5 in/1.3 cm 14.5 in/36.8 cm

Data Matrix 10 mil .3 in/.8 cm 6.2 in/15.7 cm

QR 20 mil .0 in/.0 cm 11.0 in/27.9 cm

* Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE,

TROUBLESHOOTING, &

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

Introduction

This chapter provides suggested digital scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal

descriptions (pinouts).

Maintenance

Known Harmful Ingredients

The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with

the device:

• Acetone

• Ammonia solutions

• Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions

• Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons

• Benzene

• Carbolic acid

• Compounds of amines or ammonia

• Ethanolamine

• Ethers

• Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including wipes)

• Ketones

• TB-lysoform

• Toluene

• Trichloroethylene.

IMPORTANT Use pre-moistened wipes and do not allow liquid cleaner to pool.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

4 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Approved Cleaners for the Digital Scanner and Cradle

• Hydrogen peroxide

• Mild dish soap.

Cleaning the Digital Scanner

Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any

abrasive material to touch the window.

To clean the digital scanner:

1. Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes.

2. Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the

digital scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the digital scanner window, trigger, cable connector or

any other area on the device.

3. Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach

tight or inaccessible areas).

4. Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window.

5. Wipe the digital scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material

such as eyeglasses.

6. Immediately dry the digital scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking.

7. Allow the unit to air dry before use.

Digital s

canner connectors:

a. Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in an approved cleaner.

b. Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra

digital scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector.

c. Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area.

d. Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth

across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 4 - 3

Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions

The aiming pattern does not

appear when pressing the

trigger.

No power to the digital scanner. If the configuration requires a power

supply, re-connect the power supply.

Incorrect host interface cable is

used.

Connect the correct host interface cable.

Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.

Digital scanner is disabled. For IBM 468x and USB IBM Hand-held,

IBM Table-Top, and OPOS modes, enable

the digital scanner via the host interface.

Otherwise, see the technical person in

charge of scanning.

If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode,

CTS is not asserted.

Assert CTS line.

Aiming pattern is disabled. Enable the aiming pattern. See Hand-Held

Decode Aiming Pattern on page 5-18.

Digital scanner emits aiming

pattern, but does not decode

the bar code.

Digital scanner is not programmed

for the correct bar code type.

Program the digital scanner to read that

type of bar code. See Chapter 13,

Symbologies.

Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar code

type to determine if the bar code is

defaced.

The symbol is not completely inside

aiming pattern.

Move the symbol completely within the

aiming pattern.

Move the symbol completely within the

field of view (AIM pattern does NOT define

FOV)

Distance between digital scanner

and bar code is incorrect.

Move the digital scanner closer to or

further from the bar code. See Decode

Ranges on page 3-8.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

4 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Digital scanner decodes bar

code, but does not transmit

the data to the host.

Digital scanner is not programmed

for the correct host type.

Scan the appropriate host type

programming bar code. See the chapter

corresponding to the host type.

Interface cable is loose. Re-connect the cable.

Cradle is not programmed for the

correct host type.

Check digital scanner host parameters or

edit options.

Digital scanner is not paired to host

connected interface.

Pair digital scanner to the cradle by

scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle.

Cradle has lost connection to the

host.

In this exact order: disconnect power

supply; disconnect host cable; wait three

seconds; reconnect host cable; reconnect

power supply; reestablish pairing.

If the digital scanner emits four long

low beeps, a transmission error

occurred.

This occurs if a unit is not properly

configured or connected to the

wrong host type.

Set the digital scanner's communication

parameters to match the host's setting.

If the digital scanner emits five low

beeps, a conversion or format error

occurred.

Configure the digital scanner's conversion

parameters properly.

If the digital scanner emits

low/high/low beeps, it detected an

invalid ADF rule.

Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to

the Advanced Data Formatting

Programmer Guide.

Host displays scanned data

incorrectly.

Digital scanner is not programmed

to work with the host.

Scan the appropriate host type

programming bar code.

For RS-232, set the digital scanner's

communication parameters to match the

host's settings.

For a Keyboard Wedge configuration,

program the system for the correct

keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS

LOCK key.

Program the proper editing options (e.g.,

UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).

Digital scanner emits short

low/short medium/short high

beep sequence (power-up

beep sequence) more than

once.

The USB bus may put the digital

scanner in a state where power to

the digital scanner is cycled on and

off more than once.

Normal during host reset.

Table 4-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 4 - 5

Digital scanner emits four

short high beeps during

decode attempt.

Digital scanner has not completed

USB initialization.

Wait several seconds and scan again.

Digital scanner emits

Low/low/low/extra low beeps

when not in use.

RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set

the digital scanner's RS-232 parity to

match the host setting.

Digital scanner emits

low/high beeps during

programming.

Input error, incorrect bar code or

Cancel bar code was scanned.

Scan the correct numeric bar codes within

range for the parameter programmed.

Digital scanner emits

low/high/low/high beeps

during programming.

Out of host parameter storage

space.

Scan Default Parameters on page 5-5.

Out of memory for ADF rules. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the

number of steps in the ADF rules.

During programming, indicates out

of ADF parameter storage space.

Erase all rules and re-program with shorter

rules.

Digital scanner emits

low/high/low beeps.

ADF transmit error. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting

Guide for information.

Invalid ADF rule is detected. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting

Guide for information.

Digital scanner emits a

power-up beep after

changing USB host type.

The USB bus re-established power

to the digital scanner.

Normal when changing USB host type.

Digital scanner emits one

high beep when not in use.

In RS-232 mode, a <BEL>

character was received and Beep

on <BEL> option is enabled.

Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled

and the digital scanner is in RS-232 mode.

Digital scanner emits

frequent beeps.

No power to the digital scanner. Check the system power. If the

configuration requires a power supply,

re-connect the power supply.

Incorrect host interface cable is

used.

Verify that the correct host interface cable

is used. If not, connect the correct host

interface cable.

Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and

re-connect cables.

Table 4-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

4 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Digital scanner emits five

long low beeps after a bar

code is decoded.

Conversion or format error was

detected.

The digital scanner’s conversion

parameters are not properly

configured.

Ensure the digital scanner’s conversion

parameters are properly configured.

Conversion or format error was

detected.

An ADF rule was set up with

characters that can't be sent for the

host selected.

Change the ADF rule, or change to a host

that can support the ADF rule.

Conversion or format error was

detected.

A bar code was scanned with

characters that can't be sent for that

host.

Change the bar code, or change to a host

that can support the bar code.

The digital scanner does not

connect to the

tablet/PC/phone using a

Bluetooth Serial connection

(SPP) or while emulating a

Bluetooth keyboard (HID).

N/A 1.Turn off and then turn back on the

Bluetooth radio on the tablet/PC/phone.

A reboot of the tablet/PC/phone may be

required.

2. Remove the device from the PC. Scan

Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5 and

reconfigure the digital scanner from

scratch.

When trying to pair the

digital scanner and cradle by

scanning the pairing bar

code on the CR2278, the

digital scanner emits a

rejection beep.

Pairing attempt occurs after

scanning Set Factory Defaults.

After scanning Set Factory Defaults

either insert the digital scanner in the

cradle to pair or wait five seconds before

scanning the pairing bar code on the

cradle.

Digital s

canner LED blinks

even if the pairing request

was canceled from remote

iOS/Android device.

If pass key entry is canceled from

the tablet/phone, the digital scanner

remains in the pass key entry mode

for 30 seconds before timing out.

To exit pass key entry mode scan Cancel

on page H-1 or scan any other bar code.

There is a delay before

illumination and aim turn on

after a trigger pull.

N/A Increase Time Delay to Low Power Mode

on page 5-12 to help with radio wake up.

Note: This could impact overall battery

life.

There are firmware update

failures (the firmware

download does not go

through).

N/A Increase Time Delay to Low Power Mode

on page 5-12 to help with radio wake up.

Table 4-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 4 - 7

Report Software Version Bar Code

When contacting support, a support representative may ask you to scan the bar code below to determine the

version of software installed in the digital scanner.

NOTE If after performing these checks the digital scanner still experiences problems, contact the distributor or

call support.

Report Software Version

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

4 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Technical Specifications

Table 4-2 Technical Specifications

Item Description

Physical Characteristics

Dimensions

Digital s

canner

Presentation Cradle

6.9 in. H x 2.6 in. W x 3.5 in. D

17.5 cm. H x 6.6 cm. W x 9.0 cm. D

2.8 in. H x 3.7 in. W x 4.8 in. D

7.2 cm. H x 9.4 cm. W x 12.2 cm. D

Weight

Digital s

canner

Presentation Cradle

7.5 oz. / 214 g

5.2 oz. / 151 g

Input Voltage Range (DS2278 and Cradle) 4.5 to 5.5 VDC Host Powered; 4.5 to 5.5 VDC External Power Supply

Current (Presentation Cradle and Micro USB

Cable)

500 mA (typical) Standard USB; 1100 mA (typical) BC 1.2 USB

Color Nova White, Twilight Black

Supported Host Interfaces USB, RS-232, Keyboard Wedge, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS-485

USB Certification DS2278 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org

for more

details.

Keyboard Support Supports over 90 international keyboards

User Indicators Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, Rear View LEDs,

Beeper (adjustable tone and volume)

Performance Characteristics

Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held) Up to 5 in./13 cm. per second for 13 mil UPC

Swipe Speed (Hands-Free) Up to 30.0 in./76.2 cm. per second for 13 mil UPC

Aiming Pattern Linear 624nm Amber LED

Illumination Two 645nm Super-Red LEDs

Imager Field of View 32.8° H x 24.8° V Nominal

Image Sensor 640 x 480 pixels

Minimum Print Contrast 25% minimum reflective difference

Skew Tolerance +/- 65°

Pitch Tolerance +/- 65°

Roll Tolerance 0° - 360°

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 4 - 9

User Environment

Operating Temperature

Digital s

canner

Presentation Cradle

32.0° to 122.0° F/0.0° to 50.0° C

32.0° to 104.0° F/0.0° to 40.0° C

Storage Temperature -40.0° to 158.0° F/-40.0° to 70.0° C

Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing

Drop Specification Designed to withstand multiple drops at 5.0 ft./1.5 m to concrete

Tumble Specification Designed to withstand 250 tumbles in 1.5 ft./.5 m tumbler

Note: 1 tumble = 0.5 cycle

Environmental Sealing IP52

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) DS2278 and Presentation Cradle: ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV

Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV Indirect

Ambient Light Immunity 0 to 10,000 Foot Candles / 0 to 107,600 Lux

Radio Specifications

Bluetooth Radio Standard Bluetooth Version 4.0 with BLE:

Direct line of sight in open air: Class 2: Minimum 30 ft. (10.0 m) and

up to 300 ft. (100.0 m) when paired with CR2278 cradle.

Environmental factors may impact results. Serial Port and HID

Profiles; output power adjustable down from 2.0 dBm in 8 steps.

Battery

Battery Capacity/Battery Type 2,400 mAh Li-Ion Battery

Scans Per Battery Charge 110,000 scans at 60 scans per minute or 50,000 scans at 10 scans

per minute

Note: Simulated Checkout profile of 10 scans in 10 seconds with a 50

second rest.

Operating Time Per Full Charge 84.0 hours

Note: Simulated Checkout profile of 10 scans in 10 seconds with a 50

second rest.

Charge Time (from Empty)

Standard USB

BC1.2 USB

External 5V Source

Micro USB

BC1.2 Micro USB

14 Hour Shift Hours Full Charge Hours

4 17

1 5

1.5 7

1 4

Table 4-2 Technical Specifications (Continued)

Item Description

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

4 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Symbol Decode Capability

1D Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI Plessey,

UPC/EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32

(Italian Pharma)

2D PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec, DataMatrix, MaxiCode,

QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin (Chinese Sensible), Postal Codes

Minimum Element Resolution

Code 39 4.0 mil

Code 128 4.0 mil

Data Matrix 6.0 mil

QR Code 6.7 mil

Utilities and Management

123Scan Programs digital scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides

scanned bar code data and prints reports (see Chapter 2, 123Scan

and Software Tools).

Symbol Scanner SDK Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including

documentation, drivers, test utilities and sample source code

(www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows

)

Scanner Management Service (SMS) Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset

information (www.zebra.com/sms

Table 4-2 Technical Specifications (Continued)

Item Description

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 4 - 11

Cradle Signal Descriptions

Figure 4-1 Cradle Pinouts

The signal descriptions in Table 4-3 apply to the contacts on the digital scanner and are for reference only.

The signal descriptions in Table 4-4 apply to the connectors on the DS2278 digital scanner and are for reference

only.

PIN 1

PIN 4

Table 4-3 Signal Pinouts

Pin Function

1 5VDC

2 USB_D-

3 USB_D+

4 Ground

Table 4-4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs

Pin USB RS-232 Keyboard Wedge IBM

1 Short to Pin 6 Reserved 1M Resistor to Pin 8 2M Resistor to Pin 8

2 Power Power Power Power

3 Ground Ground Ground Ground

4 Reserved TXD KBD_CLK IBM_TXD

5 D + RXD TERM_DATA IBM_RXD

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

4 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

6 Short to Pin 1 RTS KBD_DATA IBM_DIR

7 D - CTS TERM_CLK Reserved

8 Reserved Reserved 1M Resistor to Pin 1 2M Resistor to Pin 1

9 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

10 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

SHELL Shield Shield Shield Shield

Table 4-4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs (Continued)

Pin USB RS-232 Keyboard Wedge IBM

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

CHAPTER 5 USER PREFERENCES &

MISCELLANEOUS

OPTIONS

Introduction

You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes

user preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 5-1 on page 5-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the

power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks indicate (

*) default values.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

(1)

Feature/option

* Indicates default

Option value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

5 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan

the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 5-8. The scanner issues a fast

warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Serial Response Timeout or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several

bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults

Table 5-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software

Tools.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 5-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Number

SSI

Number

Default

Page

Number

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter N/A N/A N/A

5-5

Parameter Bar Code Scanning 236 ECh Enable

5-6

Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable

5-6

Beeper Volume 140 8Ch High

5-7

Beeper Tone 145 91h Medium

5-8

Beeper Duration 628 F1h 74h Medium

5-9

Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do Not Suppress

5-9

LED on Good Decode 744 F1h E8h Enable

5-10

Direct Decode Indicator 859 F2h 5Bh Disable

5-10

Low Power Mode 128 80h Enable

5-11

Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 100 msec

5-12

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 3

Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 729 F1h D9h 15 sec

5-14

Battery Preservation Mode 1765 F8h 06h E5h Enable

5-15

Trigger Mode (or Hand-Held Trigger Mode) 138 8Ah Standard (Level)

5-16

Hands-Free Mode 630 F1h 76h Enable

5-17

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable

5-18

Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming

Pattern

590 F1h 4Eh Enable Hands-Free

(Presentation) Decode

Aiming Pattern on PDF

5-19

Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Disable Picklist Mode

Always

5-20

Continuous Bar Code Read 649 F1h 89h Disable

5-21

Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable

5-21

Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Seconds

5-22

Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout 400 F0 90 15

5-22

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 137 89h 0.5 Seconds

5-23

Timeout Between Decodes, Different

Symbols

144 90h 0.1 Seconds

5-23

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) 537 F1h 19h Auto 5-24

Mobile Phone/Display Mode N/A N/A N/A

5-24

PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable

5-25

PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 200 ms

5-25

Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable

5-26

Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh High

5-26

Low Light Scene Detection 810 F2h 2Ah Dim Illumination Low

Light Assist Scene

Detection

5-27

Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Mode

Only)

858 F2h 5Ah Less

5-28

Product ID (PID) Type 1281 F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique

5-29

Product ID (PID) Value 1725 F8h 06h BDh 0

5-29

ECLevel 1710 F8h 06h AEh 0

5-30

Table 5-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI

Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

5 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Miscellaneous Options

Enter Key N/A N/A N/A

5-31

Tab Key N/A N/A N/A

5-31

Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None

5-32

Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF>

5-33

Suffix 1 Value

Suffix 2 Value

98, 104

100, 106

62h, 68h

64h, 6Ah

7013 <CR><LF>

5-33

Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data As Is

5-34

FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh 7013 <CR><LF>

5-36

Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5E Disable

5-37

Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 F8h 04h 5Eh Disable

5-38

Send Versions

Software Version N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Serial Number N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Manufacturing Information N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Table 5-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI

Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 5

User Preferences

Default Parameters

Scan one of the following bar codes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows:

• Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows:

• If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults bar code, scanning

the Restore Defaults bar code restores these custom values.

• If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults bar code

restores the factory default values. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for these values.

• Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See Appendix A,

Standard Default Parameters for these values.

Write to Custom Defaults

To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to

Custom Defaults.

NOTE To pair the scanner and cradle after scanning Set Factory Defaults either insert the scanner in the cradle

to pair or wait five seconds before scanning the pairing bar code on the cradle.

Restore Defaults

Set Factory Defaults

Write to Custom Defaults

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

5 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Parameter Bar Code Scanning

Parameter # 236

SSI # ECh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter bar codes,

including the Set Defaults bar codes.

Beep After Good Decode

Parameter # 56

SSI # 38h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode.

If you select Disable Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to

indicate error conditions.

*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning

(1)

Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning

(0)

*Enable Beep After Good Decode

(1)

Disable Beep After Good Decode

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 7

Beeper Volume

Parameter # 140

SSI # 8Ch

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a beeper volume.

Low Volume

(2)

Medium Volume

(1)

*High Volume

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

5 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Beeper Tone

Parameter # 145

SSI # 91h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a beeper tone for the good decode beep.

Disable Tone

(3)

Low Tone

(2)

*Medium Tone

(1)

High Tone

(0)

Medium to High Tone (2-tone)

(4)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 9

Beeper Duration

Parameter # 628

SSI # F1h 74h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the duration for the good decode beep.

Suppress Power Up Beeps

Parameter # 721

SSI # F1h D1h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner’s power-up beeps.

Short Duration

(0)

*Medium Duration

(1)

Long Duration

(2)

*Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps

(0)

Suppress Power Up Beeps

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

5 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

LED on Good Decode

Parameter # 744

SSI # F1h E8h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not the LED blinks on a good decode.

Direct Decode Indicator

Parameter # 859

SSI # F2h 5Bh

This parameter is only supported in Auto Aim and Standard (Level) Trigger Mode. Scan one of the following bar

codes to select optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode. You must continue to hold the trigger

upon decode to see the illumination blink. If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. If you

release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional feedback for a

successful decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.

• *Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode.

• 1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode.

• 2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.

*Enable LED on Good Decode

(2)

Disable LED on Good Decode

(0)

*Disable Direct Decode Indicator

(0)

1 Blink

(1)

2 Blinks

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 11

Low Power Mode

Parameter # 128

SSI # 80h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode

attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections. If disabled, power

remains on after each decode attempt.

If you enable this, see Time Delay to Low Power Mode to set the inactivity time period.

NOTE The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when

Trigger Mode on page 5-16 is set to Level (Standard).

*Enable Low Power Mode

(1)

Disable Low Power Mode

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

5 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Time Delay to Low Power Mode

Parameter # 146

SSI # 92h

This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering low power mode. The digital

scanner wakes upon trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate with the digital scanner.

NOTE This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.

*100 msec

(65)

500 msec

(69)

1 Second

(17)

2 sec

(18)

3 sec

(19)

4 sec

(20)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 13

Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)

5 sec

(21)

10 sec

(26)

15 sec

(27)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

5 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim

Parameter # 729

SSI # F1 D9

This parameter sets the time the scanner remains in auto aim before entering Low Power Mode.

Disabled

(0)

5 sec

(5)

* 15 sec

(11)

30 sec

(13)

1 minute

(17)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 15

Battery Preservation Mode

Parameter # 1765

SSI # F8h 06h E5h

Battery Preservation Mode preserves the battery charge when the digital scanner is not being used for an

extended period of time.

• Scan Enable Battery Preservation Mode to internally disconnect the battery from the digital scanner when

the digital scanner is unused and not being charged for nine hours

. In this mode the scanner completely

turns off. This preserves the battery charge as there is no current drain on the battery and significantly

extends battery shelf life. To exit Battery Preservation Mode

and return to normal operation either press the

digital scanner trigger or return to charging. The digital scanner cannot scan until the wake up process is

complete

. This takes a few seconds. The amount of time before the battery disconnects from the scanner

can be set via Battery Preservation Timeout Value below.

• Scan Disable Battery Preservation Mode to keep the battery connected to the digital scanner at all times.

This prevents the battery from being disconnected from the scanner after hours of sitting idle (no scanning)

and not charging. When Battery Preservation Mode is disabled, substantial battery shelf life improvements

are not gained as compared to when Battery Preservation Mode is enabled.

• Scan Battery Preservation Timeout followed by 3 digits in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes to select a

different battery preservation timeout value (the default for battery preservation timeout is nine hours). For

example, if the preservation timeout value should be 12 hours, scan Battery Preservation Timeout below,

then scan 0, 1, and 2 in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. To correct an error or change the selection,

scan Cancel on page G-3.

NOTES

Nine hours is the default timeout value but can be changed via Battery Preservation Timeout Value.

Low Power Mode (5-11) must be enabled for Battery Preservation Mode to take effect.

When asleep in Battery Preservation Mode, the digital scanner cannot be accessed for remote

management.

*Enable Battery Preservation Mode

(9)

Disable Battery Preservation Mode

(0)

Battery Preservation Timeout Value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

5 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Trigger Mode

Parameter # 138

SSI # 8Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a trigger mode for the scanner:

• Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the bar

code decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 5-22 occurs.

• Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of

view. After a period of non-use, the scanner illumination and aimer settings change due to the default Low

Light Scene Detection setting. The scanner re-activates decode processing when the scanner senses

motion.

• Auto Aim - The scanner projects the aiming pattern when lifted. A trigger press activates decode processing.

After two seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off.

*Standard (Level)

(0)

Presentation (Blink)

(7)

Auto Aim

(9)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 17

Hands-Free Mode

Parameter # 630

SSI # F1h 76h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable

hands-free

mode:

• Enable Hands-Free Mode - When you place the scanner in a stand, it automatically triggers when

presented with a bar code. Lifting the scanner or pulling the trigger causes it to behave according to the

setting of the Trigger Mode on page 5-16.

• Disable Hands-Free Mode - The scanner behaves according to the setting of the Trigger Mode on page

5-16 regardless of whether it is hand-held or in stand.

*Enable Hands-Free Mode

(1)

Disable Hands-Free Mode

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

5 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 306

SSI # F0h 32h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode:

• Enable

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during bar code capture.

• Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.

• Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner

detects a PDF bar code.

NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5-20 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern.

*Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

(2)

Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)

Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 19

Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 590

SSI # F1h 4Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode:

• Enable Hands-Free

(Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during bar

code capture.

• Disable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.

• Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when

the scanner detects a PDF bar code.

NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5-20 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when you disable the

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern.

Enable Hands-Free (Presentation)

Decode Aiming Pattern

(1)

Disable Hands-Free (Presentation)

Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)

*Enable Hands-Free (Presentation)

Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 19

5 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Picklist Mode

Parameter # 402

SSI # F0h 92h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Picklist Mode. In this mode, you can pick out and decode a bar

code from a group of bar codes that are printed close together by placing the aiming pattern on the bar code you

want to decode.

• Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled.

• Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-Held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of hands-free

mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode.

• Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-Free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free

mode only.

• Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.

NOTE Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the

decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled.

Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer bar codes.

Enable Picklist Mode Always

(2)

Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-Held Mode

(1)

Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-Free Mode

(3)

*Disable Picklist Mode Always

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 20

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 21

Continuous Bar Code Read

Parameter # 649

SSI # F1h 89h

Scan Enable Continuous Bar Code Read to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed.

Unique Bar Code Reporting

Parameter # 723

SSI # F1h D3h

Scan Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is

pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled.

NOTE We strongly recommend enabling Picklist Mode on page 5-20 with this parameter. Disabling Picklist Mode

can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the scanner's field of view.

Enable Continuous Bar Code Read

(1)

*Disable Continuous Bar Code Read

(0)

*Enable Unique Bar Code Reporting

(1)

Disable Unique Bar Code Reporting

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 21

5 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decode Session Timeout

Parameter # 136

SSI # 88h

This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in

0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.

To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G,

Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For

example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this bar code, and then scan the 0 and 5 bar

codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3

Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout

Parameter # 400

SSI # F0 90

This parameter is the hands-free compliment to the Decode Session Timeout. It configures the minimum and

maximum decode processing time during a hands-free scan attempt. It only applies to the hands-free trigger mode

or when a scanner is place in the gooseneck stand. The default is 15; range = 2 - 255.

The minimum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object

is removed or left stationary in the imaging field of view.

The maximum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object

is left in or is moving in the field of view.

Both the maximum and minimum times are configured using a single setting. The relationship of this setting is as

follows:

For example, a setting value of 100 results in the scanner turning off approximately 1 second after an object is

removed from the field of view or 10 seconds while an object is in the field of view moving.

The default value of the setting is 15 which results in a minimum time of 250 ms and maximum time of 2.5 seconds.

Adjust this setting based on your requirements. For example, when doing PDF prioritization, this parameter should

be set to a value where the maximum time is above the PDF prioritization timeout.

To set a three digit value scan the following bar code, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric

Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel

on page G-3.

Decode Session Timeout

Setting Value

Minimum Time Maximum Time

X < 25 250 ms 2.5 Seconds

X >= 25 X * 10 ms X * 100 ms

Setting value must be three digits.

Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 22

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 23

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Parameter # 137

SSI # 89h

Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Bar Code Read mode to prevent the scanner from

continuously decoding the same bar code when it is left in the scanner’s field of view. The bar code must be out of

the field of view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable

in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds.

To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar

codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols

Parameter # 144

SSI # 90h

Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner waits before

decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is

0.1 seconds.

To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar

codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments..

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

NOTE Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the Decode Session

Timeout.

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 23

5 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only)

Parameter # 537

SSI # F1h 19h

Select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes:

• Always - decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images

• Never - do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images

• Auto - decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.

Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Never

(0)

Always

(1)

*Auto

(2)

NOTE Reading bar codes on mobile phones does not require a special mode of operation.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 24

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 25

PDF Prioritization

Parameter # 719

SSI # F1h CFh

Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D bar codes (see Note below) by the value specified in

PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US

driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports

the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the scanner to report it.

This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.

PDF Prioritization Timeout

Parameter # 720

SSI # F1h D0h

If you enabled PDF Prioritization, set this timeout to indicate how long the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417

symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view.

Scan the following bar code, and then scan four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that specify the

timeout in milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following bar code, and then scan 0400. The range

is 0 to 5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.

NOTE

The 1D Code 128 bar code lengths include the following:

• 7 to 10 characters

• 14 to 22 characters

• 27 to 28 characters

In addition, a Code 39 bar code with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US

driver’s license:

• 8 characters

• 12 characters

Enable PDF Prioritization

(1)

*Disable PDF Prioritization

(0)

PDF Prioritization Timeout

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 25

5 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decoding Illumination

Parameter # 298

SSI # F0h 2Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding.

Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the

illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.

Illumination Brightness

Parameter # 669

SSI # F1h 9Dh

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This

only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).

*Enable Decoding Illumination

(1)

Disable Decoding Illumination

(0)

NOTE Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.

Low Illumination Brightness

(2)

Medium Illumination Brightness

(4)

*High Illumination Brightness

(8)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 26

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 27

Low Light Scene Detection

Parameter # 810

SSI # F2h 2Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to allow the scanner to detect motion in dim to dark illumination environments

when in presentation mode:

• No Low Light Scene Detection - The scanner attempts to detect motion as best it can with the aim pattern

and illumination turned off when the scanner is idle.

• Aiming Pattern Low Light Assist Scene Detection - Illumination is off, but the aim pattern is on when the

scanner is idle to assist in scene detection.

• Dim Illumination Low Light Assist Scene Detection - The aim pattern is off, but illumination is on at a dim

level to assist in scene detection.

No Low Light Assist Scene Detection

(0)

Aiming Pattern Low Light Assist Scene Detection

(1)

*Dim Illumination Low Light Assist Scene Detection

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 27

5 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Modes Only)

Parameter # 858

SSI # F2h 5Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a motion tolerance option:

• Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D bar codes.

• More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series of

1D bar codes in rapid progression.

*Less Motion Tolerance

(0)

More Motion Tolerance

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 28

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 29

Product ID (PID) Type

Parameter # 1281

SSI # F8h 05h 01h

Scan one of the following bar codes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.

Product ID (PID) Value

Parameter # 1725

SSI # F8h 06h BDh

To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value, and then scan four numeric bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar

Codes that correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3. The range is (0,1600-1649).

*Host Type Unique

(0)

Product Unique

(1)

IBM Unique

(2)

NOTE This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global

Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.

Set PID Value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 29

5 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ECLevel

Parameter # 1710

SSI # F8h 06h AEh

To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel, and then scan five numeric bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar

Codes that correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or

change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: www.zebra.com/support

for more information.

NOTE This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global

Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows a

customer to define an ECLevel value in order to manage and control Flash Update operations on the 4690

operating system.

Set ECLevel

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 30

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 31

Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters

Enter Key

Scan the following bar code to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data.

To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-33.

Tab Key

Scan the following bar code to add a Tab key after scanned data.

Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)

Tab Key

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 31

5 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit Code ID Character

Parameter # 45

SSI # 2Dh

A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when decoding more than one

code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix

and the decoded symbol.

Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters,

see Symbol Code Identifiers on page E-1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page E-3.

NOTE If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”

Message on page 5-37, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.

Symbol Code ID Character

(2)

AIM Code ID Character

(1)

*None

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 32

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 33

Prefix/Suffix Values

Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100

SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h

Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106

SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah

You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or

suffix, scan one of the following bar codes, and then scan four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that

correspond to that value. See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.

When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit

decimal value. See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.

The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection,

scan Cancel on page G-3

NOTE To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5-34.

Scan Prefix

(7)

Scan Suffix 1

(6)

Scan Suffix 2

(8)

Data Format Cancel

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 33

5 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scan Data Transmission Format

Parameter # 235

SSI # EBh

To change the scan data format, scan one of the following bar codes corresponding to the desired format.

To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-33.

NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.

*Data As Is

(0)

(1)

(2)

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 34

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 35

Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 35

5 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

FN1 Substitution Values

Key Category Parameter # 103

Key Category SSI # 67h

Decimal Value Parameter # 109

Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh

Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any

FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key).

When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set

the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.

To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:

1. Scan the following bar code.

2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host

interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes.

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.

To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 5-36.

Set FN1 Substitution Value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 36

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 37

Transmit “No Read” Message

Parameter # 94

SSI # 5Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters:

• Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger

release or the

Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 5-22.

• Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.

NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character

for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5-32, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR

message.

NOTE This does not apply in presentation mode.

Enable No Read

(1)

*Disable No Read

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 37

5 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval

Parameter # 1118

SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh

The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set

the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval bar codes, or scan Set Another

Interval followed by four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired number of

seconds. The range is 0 - 9999.

Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature.

The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:

MOTEVTHB:nnn

where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.

10 Seconds

(10)

1 Minute

(60)

Set Another Interval

*Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 38

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 5 - 39

Send Versions

Software Version

Scan the following bar code to send the version of software installed in the scanner.

Serial Number

Scan the following bar code to send the scanner serial number to the host.

Manufacturing Information

Scan the following bar code to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host.

Software Version

Serial Number

Manufacturing Information

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 39

5 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 40

CHAPTER 6 RADIO

COMMUNICATIONS

Introduction

This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication

between the DS2278 cordless digital scanners, cradles and hosts. The chapter also includes the parameters

necessary to configure the digital scanner.

The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Radio Communication Default Table on page 6-2 (also see

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is

not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down.

If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the

power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, scan a bar code in Default Parameters on page 5-5. Throughout the

programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*) indicate default values.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

(1)

Feature/option

* Indicates default

Option value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

6 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to enable HID Function Key

Mapping, scan the Enable HID Function Key Mapping bar code listed under HID Function Key Mapping on page

6-21. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter

entry.

Other parameters, such as Bluetooth Friendly Name, require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter

descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Radio Communications Parameter Defaults

Table 6-1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

•

Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

•

Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and

Software Tools.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 6-1 Radio Communication Default Table

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

Radio Communications Host Types N/A N/A Cradle Bluetooth

Classic (Cradle Host)

6-5

Bluetooth Friendly Name 607 F1h 5Fh N/A

6-10

Discoverable Mode 610 F1h 62h General

6-11

Wi-Fi Friendly Mode 1299 F8h 05h 77h Disable

6-12

Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion N/A N/A Use All Channels

6-13

Radio Output Power 1324 F8h 05h 2Ch Medium Power Setting

6-14

Link Supervision Timeout 1698 F8h 06h A2h 5 sec

6-15

Bluetooth Radio State 1354 F8h 05h 4Ah On

6-16

Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle 1114 F8h 04h 5Ah Disable

6-17

HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay (0 msec)

6-18

HID CAPS Lock Override N/A N/A Disable

6-18

HID Ignore Unknown Characters N/A N/A Enable

6-19

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Radio Communications 6 - 3

Emulate Keypad N/A N/A Enable

6-19

Fast HID Keyboard 1361 F8h 05h 51h Enable

6-20

Quick Keypad Emulation 1362 F8h 05h 52h Enable

6-20

HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable

6-21

HID Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable

6-21

Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable

6-22

Convert Case N/A N/A No Case Conversion

6-22

Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback 559 F1h 2Fh Disable

6-23

Reconnect Attempt Interval 558 F1h 2Eh 30 sec

6-24

Auto-Reconnect 604 F1h 5Ch Auto-Reconnect

Immediately

6-25

Beep on Insertion 288 20h Enable

6-26

Beep on <BEL> 150 96 Enable

6-26

Pairing Modes 542 F1h 1Eh Unlocked

6-27

Pairing on Contacts 545 F1h 21h Enable

6-28

Toggle Pairing 1322 F8h 05h 2Ah Disable

6-29

Connection Maintenance Interval N/A N/A 15 Minutes

6-30

Batch Mode 544 F1h 20h Normal (Do Not Batch

Data)

6-33

Persistent Batch Storage 1399 F8h 05h 77h Disable

6-34

PIN Code (Set and Store) 552 F1h 28h 12345

6-35

Variable Pin Code 608 F1h 60h Static

(Default PIN code is

12345)

6-36

Bluetooth Security Levels 1393 F8h 05h 71h Low

6-37

Save Bluetooth Connection Information 1743 F8h 06h CFh Enable

6-40

Virtual Tether Alarm on the Scanner

2053

F8h 08h 05h Disable

6-41

Audio Virtual Tether Alarm on Scanner 2246 F8h 08h C6h Enable Audio Virtual

Tether Alarm Except in

Night Mode

6-42

LED Virtual Tether Alarm on Scanner 2247 F8h 08h C7h Enable

6-42

Illumination Virtual Tether Alarm on

Scanner

2248 8h 08h C8h Enable

6-42

Table 6-1 Radio Communication Default Table (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

6 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Virtual Tether Alarm Configuration on the

Cradle

2124 F8h 08h 4Ch Disable

6-44

Delay Before Virtual Tether Alarm

Activates

2054 F8h 08h 06h 30 Seconds

6-44

Virtual Tether Alarm Duration 2055 F8h 08h 07h 5 Minutes

6-45

Defeat Virtual Tether Alarm 2119 F8h 08h 47h Pause Alarm on trigger

on the scanner

6-46

Pause Virtual Tether Alarm Duration 2120 F8h 08h 48h 30 Seconds

6-46

Table 6-1 Radio Communication Default Table (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Radio Communications 6 - 5

Wireless Beeper Definitions

When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or

unsuccessful operations. See Beeper and LED Indications on page 3-1 for all beep sequences and LED displays

including those which occur during pairing operations.

Radio Communication Host Types

To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle, or to use standard Bluetooth profiles, scan the

appropriate host type bar code below.

Bluetooth Classic vs. Low Energy Bluetooth

Low Energy (LE) Bluetooth has a smaller RF footprint which significantly improves Wi-Fi co-existence. However,

LE Bluetooth is up to 7 times slower than Classic Bluetooth (0.27 Mbps versus 0.7-2.1 Mbps), so data intensive

activities such as firmware update can take significantly longer.

Cradle

Select this host type when connecting the digital scanner to the CR2278-PC communication cradle.

To establish a connection (for initial setup only):

1. Scan the Cradle-Bluetooth Classic or Cradle-Low Energy bar code.

2. Scan the pairing bar code on the cradle or place the digital scanner in the cradle.

NOTE The cradle pairs point-to-point (one digital scanner only).

The digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that

is due to the radio losing communication. See Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 6-23 for more

information.

*Cradle Bluetooth Classic

Cradle Bluetooth Low Energy

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

6 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation

Select this host type when connecting to a PC/tablet/phone emulating a Bluetooth keyboard.

•

HID Bluetooth Classic - Enables the host and digital scanner to communicate using the HID Keyboard

Profile over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner(s) is discoverable (Peripheral Mode) and also

supports Central Mode.

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the HID Bluetooth Classic bar code.

2. Connect to Central Mode or Peripheral Mode.

• Central Mode - Scan a pairing bar code with the host device's MAC address.

• Peripheral Mode - From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the

discovered device list.

•

HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable) - Enables the host to establish a HID Keyboard Profile

connection with the digital scanner over Bluetooth Low Energy radio. The digital scanner(s) is discoverable

(Peripheral Mode).

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable) bar code.

2. From the host discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the discovered device list.

HID Bluetooth Classic

HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Radio Communications 6 - 7

Simple Serial Interface (SSI)

Select this host type when connecting to a Zebra mobile device or PC/tablet/phone running a Zebra scanner SDK

app.

•

SSI Bluetooth Classic (Non-discoverable) - Enables communication with Zebra mobile computers. It

enables the digital scanner(s) to establish a connection with the host over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital

scanner is in non-discoverable mode.

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the SSI Bluetooth Classic (Non-discoverable) bar code.

2. Scan a pairing bar code with the host device's MAC address.

•

SSI Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable) - Enables communication with Scanner SDK for Android generated

apps. It enables the host to establish a connection with the digital scanner over Bluetooth Classic radio. The

digital scanner is in discoverable.

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the SSI Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable) bar code.

2. From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from your discovered device

list.

•

SSI Bluetooth LE - Enables communication and firmware downloads with apps generated using Zebra

Scanner SDKs for iOS and Android. It enables the host to establish a connection with the digital scanner over

a Bluetooth Low Energy radio. The digital scanner is in discoverable (Peripheral Mode) and also supports

Central Mode.

• Free Demonstration App - Download Scanner Control App for iOS from the App Store.

• Free Demonstration App - Download Scanner Control App for Android from the Google Play Store.

NOTE See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software Tools for information about the Scanner Control

App to download firmware.

NOTE Additional steps may be necessary depending on host's Bluetooth stack.

NOTE Go to: www.zebra.com/scannersdk for additional options to develop applications that

can be used for communication and firmware downloads.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

6 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Simple Serial Interface (continued)

SSI Bluetooth Classic (Non-Discoverable)

SSI Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable)

SSI Bluetooth LE

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Radio Communications 6 - 9

Serial Port Profile (SPP)

Select this host type when connecting to a PC/tablet/phone using a Bluetooth serial connection.

•

SPP Bluetooth Classic (Non-Discoverable) - Enables the digital scanner to establish a Serial Port Profile

(SPP) connection with the host over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is NOT discoverable

(Central Mode).

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the SPP Bluetooth Classic (Non-discoverable) bar code.

2. Scan a pairing bar code with the MAC address of the host device.

•

SPP Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable) - Enables the host to establish a Serial Port Profile (SPP)

connection with the digital scanner over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is discoverable

(Peripheral Mode).

To establish a connection (initial setup only):

1. Scan the SPP Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable) bar code.

2. From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the discovered device

list.

Bluetooth Technology Profile Support

With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, the cradle is not required for wireless communication. The digital

scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology. The digital scanner supports the standard

Bluetooth Serial Port Profile (SPP) and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other

Bluetooth devices that support these profiles.

•

SPP - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like there is a serial connection.

•

HID - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard.

SPP Bluetooth Classic (Non-Discoverable)

SPP Bluetooth Classic (Discoverable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

6 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Central/Peripheral Set Up

The digital scanner can be set up as a Central or Peripheral. When the digital scanner is set up as a Peripheral, it

is discoverable and connectible to other devices. When the digital scanner is set up as a Central, the Bluetooth

address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required. A pairing bar code with the remote

device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device. See the Pairing Using

the Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility on page 6-31 for information about creating a pairing bar code.

Central

When the digital scanner is set up as a Central (SPP), it initiates the radio connection to a Peripheral device.

Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device (see Pairing Using the

Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility on page 6-31).

Peripheral

When the digital scanner is set up as a Peripheral device (SPP), the digital scanner accepts an incoming

connection request from a remote device.

Bluetooth Friendly Name

Parameter # 607

SSI # F1h 5Fh

You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery. The

default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number, e.g., DS2278 123456789ABCDEF.

Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name; use custom defaults to maintain the

user-programmed name through a Set Defaults operation.

To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name, scan the following bar code, then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix

H, Alphaumeric Bar Codes. If the name contains less than 23 characters, Then scan End of Message in the

Advanced Data Formatting Guide.

NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the host capability.

NOTE If your application allows you to set a device name, this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly

Name.

NOTE If the scanner was discovered previously by a PC, tablet, or phone, it may take a while for the new name

to show up as the PC/tablet/phone needs to update its list. Try turning the radio off and then on, or reboot

the PC/tablet/phone.

Bluetooth Friendly Name

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Radio Communications 6 - 11

Discoverable Mode

Parameter # 610

SSI # F1h 62h

Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery:

•

Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC.

•

Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device (e.g., Q), and the device

does not appear in General Discoverable Mode. Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this

mode.

The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds, and green LEDs flash while in this mode.

It is then non-discoverable. To re-active Limited Discoverable Mode, press the trigger.

*General Discoverable Mode

(0)

Limited Discoverable Mode

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

6 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Wi-Fi Friendly Mode

Digital s

canners configured for Wi-Fi friendly mode behave as follows:

•

The digital scanner remains in sniff mode, and exits sniff mode only during firmware update.

•

If any Wi-Fi channel is excluded from the hopping sequence, Adaptive Frequency Hopping (AFH) turns off.

•

Digital s

canner (and cradle) avoid the selected Wi-Fi channels after establishing connection.

Notes

•

If using this feature, configure all digital scanners in the area for Wi-Fi friendly mode.

•

By default, no Wi-Fi channels are excluded.

•

Since Bluetooth requires a minimum of 20 channels when Wi-Fi channels 1, 6, and 11 are excluded,

a smaller number of channels are cut from the hopping sequence.

•

Updating Wi-Fi friendly settings before Bluetooth connection is recommended.

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode, then see Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion to

select any channels to exclude.

Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion

Wi-Fi Channel Exclusion

Select the channels to exclude:

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channel 1: Bluetooth channels 0-21 are excluded from hopping sequence

(2402-2423 MHz).

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channel 6: Bluetooth channels 25-46 are excluded from hopping sequence

(2427 - 2448 MHz).

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channel 11: Bluetooth channels 50-71 are excluded from hopping sequence

(2452 - 2473 MHz).

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channel 1, 6 and 11: Bluetooth channels 2-19 (2404-2421 MHz),

26-45 (2428 - 2447 MHz) and 51-69 (2453 - 2471 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channels 1 and 6: Bluetooth channels 0-21 (2402-2423 MHz) and 25-46

(2427 - 2448 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channels 1 and 11: Bluetooth channels 0-21 (2402-2423 MHz) and 50-71

(2452 - 2473 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.

•

Exclude Wi-Fi channel 6 and 11: Bluetooth channels 25-46 (2427 - 2448 MHz) and 50-71

(2452 - 2473 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.

*Disable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode

Enable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Radio Communications 6 - 13

Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion (continued)

*Use All Channels (Standard AFH)

Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 1

Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 6

Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 11

Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1, 6, and 11

Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1 and 6

Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1 and 11

Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 6 and 11

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

6 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Radio Output Power

Parameter # 1324

SSI # F8h 05h 2Ch

The DS2278 uses a Class 2 Bluetooth radio (see Technical Specifications on page 4-8 for detailed radio

information). The radio power can be reduced to restrict the transmission range and reduce the effect of the radio

on neighboring wireless systems.

Scan a bar code to select the desired power mode.

NOTE Bluetooth stack resets on power change and the device loses connection.

* Medium Power Setting

(0)

Low Power Setting

(1)

Very Low Power Setting

(2)

Ultra Low Power Setting

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

Radio Communications 6 - 15

Link Supervision Timeout

Parameter # 1698

SSI # F8h 06h A2h

Link supervision timeout controls how quickly the digital scanner senses that the Bluetooth radio lost connection to

the remote device. A lower value helps prevent data loss at the edge of the operating range while a larger value

helps prevent disconnects due to the remote device not responding in time. If you are experiencing occasional

disconnects and the digital scanner is able to reconnect, increase the link supervision timeout value.

NOTE The digital scanner only controls Link Supervision Timeout in Central Mode.

.5 Seconds

2 Seconds

* 5 Seconds

10 Seconds

20 Seconds

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

6 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Bluetooth Radio State

Parameter # 1354

SSI # F8h 05h 4Ah

HID Host Parameters

The digital scanner supports virtual keyboard emulation for the Apple iOS, and keyboard emulation over the

Bluetooth HID profile. In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID

profile as a Bluetooth keyboard. Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes.

Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle

Parameter # 1114

SSI # F8h 04h 5Ah

This option works with Apple iOS devices to enable the opening and closing of the iOS virtual keyboard by

double-pressing the trigger.

NOTE The radio on/off parameters are for both the scanner and cradle. If the scanner is NOT connected to the

cradle, the scanner’s radio will turn off. If the scanner is connected to the cradle, both the scanner and

cradle radios will be turned off.

If the cradle radio is turned off, the only options to turn the cradle radio back on is via host command or

using Parameter Batch Mode.

Bluetooth Radio Off

*Bluetooth Radio On

NOTE When this feature is enabled, the digital scanner may be incompatible with non-Apple iOS devices.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

Radio Communications 6 - 17

*Disable

(0)

Enable

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

6 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay

This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase

the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data.

HID CAPS Lock Override

When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always

enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)” keyboard type and can not be disabled.

*No Delay (0 msec)

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key

(Disable)

Override Caps Lock Key

(Enable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

Radio Communications 6 - 19

HID Ignore Unknown Characters

This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are

characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar

code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With

Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the digital scanner

issues an error beep.

Emulate Keypad

When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A is sent

as "ALT Make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break."

*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

(Enable)

Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

(Disable)

Disable Keypad Emulation

* Enable Keypad Emulation

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 19

6 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Fast HID Keyboard

Parameter # 1361

SSI # F8h 05h 51h

This option transmits Bluetooth HID keyboard data at a faster rate.

Quick Keypad Emulation

Parameter # 1362

SSI # F8h 05h 52h

This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII

characters not found on the keyboard.

Fast HID Disable

*Fast HID Enable

NOTE This option applies only to a HID Keyboard Emulation Device which has Emulate Keypad

enabled (see Emulate Keypad on page 6-19).

Quick Keypad Emulation Disable

*Quick Keypad Emulation Enable

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 20

Radio Communications 6 - 21

HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution

When enabled, this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key

Category and value chosen by the user. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36 to set the Key Category and

Key Value.

HID Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control-key sequences. When this parameter is enabled, the keys in

bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping (see Table I-1 on page I-1).

Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.

*Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution

Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution

*Disable Function Key Mapping

Enable Function Key Mapping

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 21

6 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Simulated Caps Lock

When enabled, the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the

Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard

Caps Lock state.

Convert Case

When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.

*Disable Simulated Caps Lock

Enable Simulated Caps Lock

*No Case Conversion

Convert All to Upper Case

Convert All to LowerCase

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 22

Radio Communications 6 - 23

Auto-Reconnect Feature

When in SPP Central, Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation or when connected to the cradle (Cradle Host Mode), the

digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the

radio losing communication. This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device, or if

the remote device powers down. The digital scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the

Reconnect Attempt Interval setting. During that time the green LED continues to blink.

If the auto-reconnect process fails due to page timeouts, the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep (long

low/long high) and enters low power mode. The auto-reconnect process can be re-started by pulling the digital

scanner trigger.

If the auto-reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt, the digital scanner

sounds a connection reject beep sequence (see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 6-5) and deletes the remote

pairing address. If this happens, a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote

device.

The digital scanner has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Central Mode (SPP,

Cradle). When switching between these modes, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last

device it was connected to in that mode.

Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback

Parameter # 559

SSI # F1h 2Fh

When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect. While the digital

scanner attempts to reconnect, the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails, the digital

scanner emits a page timeout beep (long low/long high) and stops blinking the LED. The process can be restarted

by pulling the trigger.

The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default. When enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 short

high beeps every 5 seconds while the re-connection attempt is in progress. Scan a bar code below to enable or

disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt.

NOTE If a bar code is scanned while the auto-reconnect sequence is in process, a transmission error beep sequence

sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host. After a connection is reestablished, normal scanning

operation returns. For error beep sequence definitions, see Beeper and LED Indications on page 3-1.

NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code (page 6-5) causes the radio to be

reset. Scanning is disabled during this time. It takes several seconds for the digital scanner to re-initialize the

radio at which time scanning is enabled.

*Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt

(0)

Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 23

6 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Reconnect Attempt Interval

Parameter # 558

SSI # F1h 2Eh

When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default

time interval of 30 seconds. This time interval can be changed to one of the options below.

To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval, scan one of the bar codes below.

*Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds

(6)

Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute

(12)

Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes

(60)

Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes

(360)

Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour

(720)

Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 24

Radio Communications 6 - 25

Auto-Reconnect

Parameter # 604

SSI # F1h 5Ch

In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID) mode, SPP Central, and when connected to the cradle (Cradle Host

Mode), select a re-connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device:

•

Auto-Reconnect on Bar Code Data: The digital scanner auto-reconnects when you scan a bar code. With

this option, a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters. The digital scanner sounds a decode

beep upon bar code scan, followed by a connection, a page timeout, a rejection beep, or a transmission error

beep. Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device. Note that

auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.

•

Auto-Reconnect Immediately: When the digital scanner loses connection, it attempts to reconnect. If a

page timeout occurs, the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull. Select this option if the digital

scanner battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is

transmitted. Note that auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.

•

Disable Auto-Reconnect: When the digital scanner loses connection, you must re-establish it manually.

Out of Range Indicator

An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt (1) on page 6-23 and

extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 6-24.

For example, with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is

taken out of range, the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a

Reconnect Attempt Interval.

When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the

re-connection attempt is in progress. If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time, such

as 30 minutes, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range

indicator.

Auto-Reconnect on Bar Code Data

(1)

*Auto-Reconnect Immediately

(2)

Disable Auto-Reconnect

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 25

6 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Beep on Insertion

Parameter # 288

SSI # 20h

When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power, it emits a short low beep. This feature is

enabled by default.

To enable or disable beeping on insertion, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Beep on <BEL>

Parameter # 150

SSI # 96h

When this parameter is enabled, the digital scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the

serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important events.

*Enable Beep on Insertion

(1)

Disable Beep on Insertion

(0)

NOTE This parameter only applies to SPP (Serial Port Profile). The RS-232 interface on the cradle has this

feature when Beep on <BEL> is enabled.

*Beep on <BEL> Enable

Beep on <BEL> Disable

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 26

Radio Communications 6 - 27

Digital Scanner To Cradle Support

Pairing

Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle.

To pair the digital scanner with the cradle, scan the pairing bar code. A high/low/high/low beep sequence indicates

that the pairing bar code was decoded. When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established,

a low/high beep sounds.

Pairing Modes

Parameter # 542

SSI # F1h 1Eh

When operating with the cradle, two modes of pairing are supported:

•

Locked Point-to-Point Pairing Mode - When a cradle is paired (connected) to the digital scanner, any

attempt to connect a different digital scanner, by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by

inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled (page 6-28), is rejected. The currently

connected digital scanner maintains connection. In this mode, you must set a Connection Maintenance

Interval on page 6-29.

•

Unlocked Point-to-Point Pairing Mode - Pair (connect) a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by

either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts

feature enabled. This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle.

To set the cradle pairing mode, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Lock Override

Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner. To use Lock

Override, scan the bar code below, followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle.

NOTE 1. The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle.

2. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes.

3. Only when the digital scanner is paired to the cradle, it automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device

when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. For more information see

Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 6-23.

*Unlocked Pairing Mode

(0)

Locked Pairing Mode

(1)

Lock Override

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 27

6 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Pairing Methods

Parameter # 545

SSI # F1h 21h

There are two methods available to pair (connect) the scanner to the cradle:

•

Scan the pairing bar code on the cradle

•

Pair on contacts by inserting the scanner into the cradle.

When the Bluetooth connection beeps sound, the scanner and cradle connect. See Wireless Beeper Definitions on

page 6-5 for other beep sequences.

Enable or disable Pair on Contacts by scanning the appropriate bar code below.

Pull Trigger Twice to Re-connect

Upon a double trigger press, the scanner attempts to connect to the last known address. This feature differs from

auto-reconnect (see Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 6-23) in that the scanner attempts connection only once and

keeps the address even on commanded disconnect. The last known address is only cleared upon a reject or with a

new successful connection. The address persists over scanner reboot.

NOTE When Pair on Contacts is enabled you may still scan the pairing bar code on the cradle.

*Enable Pair On Contacts

(1)

Disable Pair on Contacts

(0)

IMPORTANT This feature only applies to hosts capable of a commanded connection; SPP peripheral and HID

BLE hosts do not support this feature.

NOTE This feature does not interfere with a double trigger press to open/close an iOS keypad in HID mode.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 28

Radio Communications 6 - 29

Unpairing

Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC/host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital

scanner. Scan the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle/PC host.

Toggle Pairing

Parameter # 1322

SSI # F8h 05h 2Ah

If the digital scanner is configured for Toggle Pairing, scanning the Pairing bar code a second time unpairs the

scanner.

Connection Maintenance Interval

When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout, the digital scanner

immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds. If the auto-reconnect process fails, it can be

restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger.

To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range, the cradle reserves

the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval. To

connect another digital scanner: either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR

bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner; or, scan Lock Override (page 6-27) with the new digital

scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle.

NOTE When unpairing the digital scanner In Bluetooth Low Energy mode the host may issue a connection back

to the digital scanner after digital scanner disconnects.

Unpairing

*Toggle Pairing Disable

Toggle Pairing Enable

NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode (see page 6-27).

NOTE The cradle stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital

scanner condition (e.g., discharged battery). When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the

cradle, unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code

prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 29

6 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Considerations

The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval. A shorter interval allows new users to

gain access to abandoned connections more quickly, but causes problems if users leave the work area for

extended periods. A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time, but ties

up the system for new users.

To avoid this conflict, users who are going off-shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 6-29 to ignore the

Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available.

To set the Connection Maintenance Interval, scan one of the bar codes below

*Set Interval to 15 Minutes

(0)

Set Interval to 30 Minutes

(1)

Set Interval to 60 Minutes

(2)

Set Interval to 2 Hours

(3)

Set Interval to 4 Hours

(4)

Set Interval to 8 Hours

(5)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 30

Radio Communications 6 - 31

Pairing Using the Scan-To-Connect (STC) Utility

Use the STC utility to pair in one step by connecting the Zebra Bluetooth scanner to a phone, tablet, or PC by

scanning an STC bar code.

•

Windows: Go to www.zebra.com/support; search for Scan-To-Connect; select the Scan-To-Connect link;

select the Scan-To-Connect for Windows Download and Support link.

•

Android: Go to the Google Play Store at play.google.com/store and download the Zebra Scan-To-Connect

(STC) utility.

The STC utility is available as a standalone utility. Supported operating systems include Windows and Android.

For more information, go to www.zebra.com/scantoconnect

. Source code is also available for easy app integration.

Pairing Bar Code Format for Serial Port Connections

When using a serial port connection and the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Central, you must create a

pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect. The Bluetooth address

of the remote device must be known. Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows:

<Fnc 3>Bxxxxxxxxxxxx

where:

•

B (or LNKB) is the prefix

•

xxxxxxxxxxxx represents the 12-character Bluetooth address.

Pairing Bar Code Example

If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11:22:33:44:55:66, then

the pairing bar code is:

Connection Maintenance Interval (continued)

Set Interval to 24 Hours

(6)

Set Interval to Forever

(7)

NOTE Pairing using the STC utility is not supported when using a serial port interface connection. When

using a serial port connection, pair with Pairing Bar Code Format for Serial Port Connections.

Paring Bar Code Content:

‘B’ + Bluetooth Address

B112233445566

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 31

6 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Batch Mode

Parameter # 544

SSI # F1h 20h

The digital scanner supports five versions of batch mode. When the digital scanner is configured for any of the

batch modes, it attempts to store bar code data (not parameter bar codes) until transmission is initialized, or the

maximum number of bar codes are stored. When a bar code is saved successfully, a good decode beep sounds

and the LED flashes green. If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code, a low/high/low/high out of

memory beep sounds. (See page 3-1 for all beeper and LED definitions.)

In all modes, calculate the amount of data (number of bar codes) the digital scanner can store as follows:

Number of storable bar codes = 30,720 bytes of memory / (number of characters in the bar code + 3).

Modes of Operation

•

Normal (default) - Do not batch data. The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code.

•

Out of Range Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to

a remote device (for example, when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range). Data transmission

is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device (for example, when a user holding the

digital scanner walks back into range).

•

Standard Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned.

Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data.

•

Cradle Contact Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is

scanned. Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle.

•

Batch Only Mode - The digital scanner radio is turned off and the digital scanner stores all bar code data.

Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle.

IMPORTANT Batch mode does not apply to SPP Peripheral Mode.

NOTE If the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data, the new batch mode takes

effect only after all the previously batched data is sent

NOTE Do not use Out of Range Batch Mode together with the Auto-Reconnect on Bar Code Data (see

Auto-Reconnect on page 6-25). If used together, the decoded scanned data is batched and does

not allow the scanner to reconnect.

NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost.

NOTE If the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts

until the digital scanner is re-inserted in the cradle.

NOTE If the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts until the

digital scanner is re-inserted in the cradle.

The radio may be turned off as batch data is transmitted over the cradle contacts.

This mode can only be exited by scanning Normal (default) mode.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 32

Radio Communications 6 - 33

Modes of Operation (continued)

•

Parameter Batch Mode - When Parameter Batch Mode is enabled, the digital scanner stores parameter bar

code data intended for the cradle. When the digital scanner is inserted into a cradle, the batched parameter

data is sent over the cradle contacts, and the mode is disabled. This may be needed when the cradle and/or

digital scanner is configured with its radio turned off.

If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data; parameter

bar codes are not stored.

*Normal

(00h)

Out of Range Batch Mode

(01h)

Standard Batch Mode

(02h)

Cradle Contact Batch Mode

(03h)

Enter Batch Mode

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 33

6 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Modes of Operation (continued)

Persistent Batch Storage

Parameter #1399

SSI # F8h 05h 77h

When the digital scanner is configured for Persistent Batch Storage, batch data is stored in non-volatile memory

and preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down. This parameter is Disabled by default.

Send Batch Data

Batch Only Mode

Enter Parameter Batch Mode

Exit Parameter Batch Mode

NOTE Frequently storing batch data with this setting Enabled will shorten the life of the non-volatile

memory.

* Persistent Batch Disable

(0)

Persistent Batch Enable

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 34

Radio Communications 6 - 35

Bluetooth Security

The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication. Authentication can be requested by either the remote

device or the digital scanner.

PIN Code

Parameter # 552

SSI # F1h 28h

To set and store a PIN code (e.g., password) on the digital scanner to connect to the host:

1. Scan the Set & Store PIN Code bar code below.

2. Scan five alphanumeric programming bar codes using the alphanumeric bar codes beginning on page H-1.

3. Scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Guide.

The default PIN code is 12345.

If the digital scanner communicates with a host with enabled authentication/encryption, the PIN codes on the digital

scanner and host must match, otherwise pairing fails. To do this, connect the digital scanner to the host when

setting the PIN code, otherwise the new PIN code only takes effect on the digital scanner.

NOTE It is recommended that security settings are configured before connection is established. When changing

security settings ensure to delete the scanner from the remote host.

NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication.

NOTE If a PIN code entry is canceled by the host, it should be canceled on the digital scanner as well. To cancel

a PIN code entry on the digital scanner, scan Cancel on page H-1.

NOTE An extended 16 character PIN code is available for additional security with Open Bluetooth

(SPP and HID).

Set and Store PIN Code

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 35

6 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Variable PIN Code

Parameter # 608

SSI # F1h 60h

When not using Bluetooth HID Keyboard Emulation, scan Static PIN Code below to avoid entering the PIN code

manually. The PIN stored in memory is used. Scan the Variable PIN Code below to manually enter a PIN code

with each connection.

The default PIN code is the user-programmed PIN set and stored above. Typically, however, HID connections

require entering a Variable PIN Code. If, when attempting connection, the application presents a text box that

includes a PIN, scan the Variable PIN Code bar code, then re-attempt connection. When you hear a beep

indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry, enter the provided variable PIN using the

Alphaumeric Bar Codes on page H-1, then scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Guide. if the

code is less than 16 characters. The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection.

NOTE Variable PIN Code only applies when connecting to devices that are Bluetooth 2.0 or older. Do not use

Variable PIN Code parameters when connecting to the CR2278 cradle or devices with Bluetooth 2.1 or

above.

*Static PIN Code

(0)

Variable PIN Code

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 36

Radio Communications 6 - 37

Bluetooth Security Levels

Parameter # 1393

SSI # F8h 05h 71h

•

Low Bluetooth Security - The low security setting is designed for ease of connection with most devices.

This setting may be unacceptable to some devices. If connection fails, try re-connecting after increasing

security setting on the digital scanner.

If connecting to Bluetooth 2.1 device and above, Just Works method for secure and simple pairing is used

•

Medium Bluetooth Security - The medium security setting may require a passkey for the initial connection

to pair digital scanner and device.

If connecting to Bluetooth 2.1 device and above, Passkey Entry method for secure and simple pairing is

used.

•

High Bluetooth Security - The high security setting enables Man in the Middle protection for Bluetooth 2.1

and above. Not all devices are able to support this mode.

•

Legacy Bluetooth Security (Bluetooth 2.0 and below) - The legacy security setting enables authentication

and encryption for legacy pairing.

NOTE Data is encrypted using the Low Bluetooth security setting if connected to a Bluetooth 2.1 and

above device.

*Low Bluetooth Security

Medium Bluetooth Security

High Bluetooth Security

Legacy Bluetooth Security

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 37

6 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Bluetooth Radio, Linking, and Batch Operation

The DS2278 digital scanner has a Bluetooth Class 2 radio which achieves a range of at least 10.0 m/33 ft (open air,

line of sight). The actual range you achieve is influenced by the presence of other radios, shelving and wall

materials as well as which cradle is tested. The environments vary widely and often influence radio ranges.

When the digital scanner goes out of communications range to the base, it can be configured for Batch Mode (see

Batch Mode on page 6-32). The digital scanner has sufficient onboard memory to store 500 bar codes of typical

size (UPC/EAN).

Setting Up an iOS or Android Product To Work With The Digital Scanner

Perform the following steps on each device to establish a link.

HID Keyboard Emulation

1. On the DS2278, scan Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation on page 6-6.

2. On an iOS/iPad/iPhone, select Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth On. Choose the DS2278

digital scanner from the list of discovered devices. A link should be established allowing scanning into any

application with keyboard entry.

3. On an Android/ET1/Droid, select Settings > Wireless & networks > Bluetooth (to turn Bluetooth on, if not

already on). Select Bluetooth Settings and choose the DS2278 digital scanner from the list of discovered

devices. (The DS2278 digital scanner normally displays as DS2278 - xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the serial

number.)

IMPORTANT Android devices, specifically the ET1, may require you to scan a PIN to connect. If so, a PIN

displays on the device. To enter the required PIN, scan the bar code, Variable PIN Code (1) on

page 6-36 then re-attempt connection. When a beep sounds, indicating the digital scanner is

waiting for PIN entry, scan the PIN using the Numeric Bar Codes on page G-1. Incorrect scanned

entries can be deleted by scanning

Cancel on page H-1.

For more information, read the section Variable PIN Code on page 6-36.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 38

Radio Communications 6 - 39

Setting Up a Windows Product To Work With The Digital Scanner

Perform the following steps on each device to establish a link.

Serial Port Bluetooth Classic (Non-discoverable)

1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the PC task tray to open the Bluetooth Settings window.

2. Make sure Bluetooth settings are discoverable and connectible on the PC.

3. If settings were changed, reboot the PC.

4. Set up an incoming COM port. You can use an existing incoming port if one is already setup.

5. Open the incoming COM port with a serial application, such as Hyperterm.

6. Scan SPP Bluetooth Classic (Non-Discoverable) on page 6-9.

7. Make sure CoreScanner is not running.

To stop CoreScanner service:

a. Select the Windows Start icon in the bottom left corner of the screen and type Services in the Search text

box.

b. Press Enter.

c. Select CoreScanner in the list and select Stop the service.

8. Scan the pairing bar code (see Pairing Bar Code Format for Serial Port Connections on page 6-31).

9. Accept the connection request which displays in the bottom right corner of the window.

10. Wait for the connection beep to sound from the scanner.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 39

6 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Save Bluetooth Connection Information

Parameter # 1743

SSI # F8h 06h CFh

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the digital scanner’s ability to save Bluetooth connection information.

•

Enable Bluetooth Connection Information: The digital scanner saves the last connection and attempts to

reconnect after a battery swap (power cycle) if it is set to auto-reconnect. See the Auto-Reconnect Feature

on page 6-23 for more information.

•

Disable Bluetooth Connection Information: The digital scanner does not save the last connection to

permanent memory and does NOT reconnect after a battery swap (power cycle). Note that depending on

auto-reconnect settings the digital scanner still reconnect son going out of range and other conditions where

connection is lost but auto-reconnect is desired.

*Enable Bluetooth Connection Information

Disable Bluetooth Connection Information

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 40

Radio Communications 6 - 41

Virtual Tether

Virtual Tether feature allows the scanner, cradle or host application to alert users when Bluetooth connection is lost.

It works by independently controlling the scanner's illumination, audio, and LEDs.

To adjust the range of the scanner and cradle connection, change the radio power. See Radio Output Power on

page 6-14 for more information.

Virtual Tether Alarm on the Scanner

Parameter # 2053 (SSI # F8h 08h 05h)

The Virtual Tether alarm on the scanner:

•

The alarm includes audio, LED, and illumination.

•

Each Alarm Type (Audio, LED, Illumination) can be enabled or disabled using the bar codes in this section.

This allows for creation of custom alarms.

•

This feature is disabled by default.

*Disable Virtual Tether Alarm on the Scanner

(0)

Enable Virtual Tether Alarm on the Scanner

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 41

6 - 42 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Audio Virtual Tether Alarm on Scanner

Parameter #2246 (SSI # F8h 08h C6h)

Scan the bar codes below to disable or enable the Audio Virtual Tether Alarm on the scanner. When the Virtual

Tether is enabled, the audio beeper sounds at high volume.

LED Virtual Tether Alarm on Scanner

Parameter #2247 (SSI # F8h 08h C7h)

Scan the bar codes below to disable or enable the LED Virtual Tether Alarm on the scanner. When enabled, the

scanner LEDs blink green and red.

Illumination Virtual Tether Alarm on Scanner

Parameter #2248 (SSI # F8h 08h C8h)

Scan the bar codes below to disable or enable the Illumination Virtual Tether Alarm on the scanner.

Disable Audio Virtual Tether Alarm

(0)

*Enable Audio Virtual Tether Alarm

(1)

Disable LED Virtual Tether Alarm

(0)

*Enable LED Virtual Tether Alarm

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 42

Radio Communications 6 - 43

Disable Illumination Virtual Tether Alarm

(0)

*Enable Illumination Virtual Tether Alarm

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 43

6 - 44 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Virtual Tether Alarm on the Cradle

Parameter #2124 (SSI # F8h 08h 4Ch)

Scan the bar codes below to disable or enable the Virtual Tether Alarm on the cradle. When enabled, the cradle

LEDs blink green and red.

Delay Before Virtual Alarm Activates

Parameter #2054 (SSI # F8h 08h 06h)

When the device is out of range, it holds off on sounding the Virtual Tether alarm to provide an opportunity to

re-establish a connection (5 - 99 seconds). The default is 30 seconds.

To set a timeout:

1. Scan the Delay Before Alarm Activates bar code.

2. Scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired timeout duration.

Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers (for example, for an alarm to start after 5 seconds, scan the 0 bar

code and then the 5 bar code).

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page H-1.

*Disable Virtual Tether Alarm on the Cradle

(0)

Enable Visual Virtual Tether Alarm on the Cradle

(2)

NOTE Ensure that this setting is not too short in order to avoid the following:

• If the cradle resets, it causes the scanner to activate the Virtual Tether alarm.

• Noisy RF environments can lead to frequent, momentary disconnect/reconnect sequences.

Delay Before Alarm Activates

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 44

Radio Communications 6 - 45

Virtual Tether Alarm Duration

Parameter #2055 (SSI # F8h 08h 07h)

Set up the amount of time for the Alarm to play in minutes (1 - 99 minutes). The default is 5 minutes.

To set a timeout:

1. Scan the Alarm Duration bar code.

2. Scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired alarm duration. Enter

a leading zero for single digit numbers (for example, for an alarm to start after 5 minutes, scan the 0 bar code

and then the 5 bar code). The value of zero sets the duration to Infinite.

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page H-1.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm stops once the connection is established, the timeout period expires, or the scanner’s battery is drained.

Alarm Duration

NOTE Any connection stops the alarm. The scanner does not need to connect to the same cradle.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 45

6 - 46 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Defeat Virtual Tether Alarm

Parameter #2119 (SSI # F8h 08h 47h)

Pressing the trigger on the scanner can be configured to defeat or pause the alarm.

Pause Virtual Tether Alarm Duration

Parameter #2120 (SSI # F8h 08h 48h)

Pressing the trigger on the scanner pauses the alarm for a programmable number of seconds (1 - 99 seconds).

The default is 30 seconds.

To set a timeout:

1. Scan the Pause Virtual Tether Alarm Duration bar code.

2. Scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired alarm duration. Enter

a leading zero for single digit numbers (for example, for an alarm to start after 5 seconds, scan the 0 bar code

and then the 5 bar code).

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page H-1.

Do Not Defeat Alarm

(0)

*Pause Alarm on Trigger Pull

(1)

Stop Alarm on Trigger Pull

(2)

Pause Virtual Tether Alarm Duration

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 46

Radio Communications 6 - 47

Virtual Tether Alarm Considerations

•

Causes for the alarm to activate include:

• Device going out of range. Depending on configuration, both scanner and cradle can alarm if connection

between them is broken due to one of the devices going out of range.

• If cradle is unpowered, the scanner sounds the alarm. Includes USB suspend of the cradle.

• Removing battery from the scanner will cause the cradle to sound the alarm.

•

Causes for the alarm to not activate:

• Scanner and cradle need to have an existing connection before alarm activates. No alarm on power up.

• If the scanner is charging in or paired to another cradle/host by insertion or by scanning the pairing bar

code, since it presumed that in this case the scanner is not lost.

• If another scanner connects to the cradle and causes the original scanner to disconnect.

• If any of the batch modes are enabled or if auto-reconnect is NOT set to reconnect immediately.

• Virtual Tether does not apply to the hosts that do not support auto-reconnect feature such as HID

Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable) and SPP BT Classic (Discoverable).

• Alarm is not activated if the disconnection occurs due to firmware update or configuration via 123Scan or

SMS.

• If scanner is connected to another cradle/host by insertion or by scanning the pairing barcode.

•

Battery Preservation Mode:

• If the scanner disconnects from the cradle due to the activation of the Battery Preservation Mode and the

Virtual Tether Alarm on the cradle is enabled, only the LEDs on the cradle blink green and red.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 47

6 - 48 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 48

CHAPTER 7 SIGNATURE CAPTURE

PREFERENCES

Introduction

You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter

describes signature capture preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 7-1 on page 7-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5. Throughout the programming

bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

NOTE Although the DS2278 digital scanner supports signature capture, the quality of the image is not

guaranteed. If the image does not meet your needs it is recommended that you upgrade to a DS8178

scanner.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

(1)

Feature/option

* Indicates default

Option value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

7 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to enable signature capture, scan

the Enable Signature Capture bar code under Signature Capture on page 7-3. The digital scanner issues a fast

warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults

Table 7-1 lists defaults for image capture preference parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

•

Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

•

Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software

Tools.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

See Appendix K, Signature Capture Code for signature capture code information.

Table 7-1 Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Number

SSI

Number

Default

Page

Number

Signature Capture Preferences

Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable

7-3

Signature Capture File Format Selector 313 F0h 39h JPEG

7-4

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP) 314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP

7-5

Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400

7-6

Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100

7-6

Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65

7-6

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Signature Capture Preferences 7 - 3

Signature Capture Preferences

The parameters in this chapter control signature capture characteristics.

Signature Capture

Parameter # 93

SSI # 5Dh

A signature capture bar code is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a

document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index

to various signatures. The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area. See

Appendix K, Signature Capture Code for more information.

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Signature Capture.

Enable Signature Capture

(1)

*Disable Signature Capture

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

7 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Signature Capture File Format Selector

Parameter # 313

SSI # F0h 39h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or

JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.

Output File Format

Decoding a signature capture bar code de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or

TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.

Table 7-2 Output File Format

File Descriptor

Signature Image

Output Format

(1 byte)

Signature Type (1 byte)

Signature Image Size

(4 bytes)

(BIG Endian)

JPEG - 1

BMP - 3

TIFF - 4

1-8 0x00000400 0x00010203….

BMP Signature Format

(3)

*JPEG Signature Format

(1)

TIFF Signature Format

(4)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Signature Capture Preferences 7 - 5

Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel

Parameter # 314

SSI # F0h 3Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a

signature:

•

1 BPP - For a black and white image.

•

4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.

•

8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.

NOTE The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.

1 BPP

(0)

4 BPP

(1)

*8 BPP

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

7 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Signature Capture Width

Parameter # 366

SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh

The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the

signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to

height.

To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width bar code, and then scan four bar

codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 640 decimal.

Signature Capture Height

Parameter # 367

SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh

To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height bar code, and then scan three

bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal.

Signature Capture JPEG Quality

Parameter # 421

SSI # F0h A5h

Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes

corresponding to a value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.

Signature Capture Width (Default: 400)

(001 - 640 Decimal)

Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)

(001 - 480 Decimal)

JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)

(5 - 100 Decimal)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

CHAPTER 8 USB INTERFACE

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with a USB host. The cradle connects directly to a USB host, or a

powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 8-1 on page 8-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks (

*) indicate default values.

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to

medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) bar code under USB Keystroke Delay on page 8-8. The scanner

issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

Feature/option* Indicates default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

8 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Connecting a USB Interface

Figure 8-1 USB Connection.

The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including:

• TGCS (IBM) terminals

• Apple™ desktop and notebooks

• Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.

The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:

• Windows

XP, 7, 8, 10

• MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6

• IBM 4690 OS.

The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).

Interface cable

USB series A

shielded connector

NOTE If you already have existing non shielded cables from legacy products (such as the LS2208) they can be

reused. However, be aware that the shielded cables provide improved ESD performance. For information

about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at:

partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Universal-Cabl

e-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

USB Interface 8 - 3

To set up the digital scanner:

1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle.

2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of

the IBM SurePOS terminal.

3. The digital scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*)

does not meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from

USB Device Type on page 8-5.

4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device

driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the

last choice. The digital scanner powers up during this installation.

5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 4-3.

USB Parameter Defaults

Table 8-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software

Tools.

NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples

only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner

are the same.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, symbologies, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 8-1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults

Parameter Default

Page

Number

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type USB Keyboard HID 8-5

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking Enable 8-7

Native Firmware Update Disable 8-7

USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 8-8

USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 8-8

Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Enable 8-9

USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 8-9

USB Fast HID Enable 8-10

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

8 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB Polling Interval 3 msec 8-11

Keypad Emulation Enable 8-13

Quick Keypad Emulation Enable 8-13

Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero Enable 8-14

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 8-14

Function Key Mapping Disable 8-15

Simulated Caps Lock Disable 8-15

Convert Case None 8-16

USB Static CDC Enable 8-16

CDC Beep on <BEL> Enable 8-17

USB CDC Host Variant CDC Standard 8-17

TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep Honor 8-19

TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive Ignore 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive Ignore 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version Version 2.2 8-21

Table 8-1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

USB Interface 8 - 5

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB

Keyboard HID host, see Appendix B, Country Codes.

NOTES

1. When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.

2. When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If you

require two connections, select IBM Table-Top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-Held USB for the second

scanner.

3. Select IBM Hand-Held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable

command. Aim, illumination, and decoding is still permitted. Select OPOS (IBM Hand-Held with Full

Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command, including

aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.

USB Keyboard HID

IBM Table-Top USB

IBM Hand-Held USB

OPOS

(IBM Hand-Held with Full Disable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

8 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB Device Type (continued)

NOTES

1. Before scanning USB CDC Host on page 8-6, install the appropriate USB CDC Driver on the host to ensure

the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). Go to

www.zebra.com/support

, Support & Downloads > Barcode Scanners > USB CDC Driver, select the

appropriate Windows platform, and download either Zebra_CDC_ACM_Driver_(x64)v2.15.0004.exe (64 bit)

or Zebra_CDC_ACM_Driver(x86)_v2.15.0004.exe (32 bit).

To recover a stalled scanner:

Install the USB CDC Driver

Unplug the USB cable and then reconnect it to add power back to the scanner. Scan HID Keyboard or

another host.

After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the digital scanner to power up using an

alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.

2. To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide.

3. Select USB HID POS to communicate over a USB cable with Universal Windows Platform (UWP)

applications running on Windows 10 devices.

USB CDC Host

SSI over USB CDC

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface

USB HID POS

(for Windows 10 devices only)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

USB Interface 8 - 7

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking

After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to

enable or disable status handshaking.

Native Firmware Update

Parameter # 1727

SSI # F8h 06h BFh

Some scanners that support an auxiliary scanner reboot after setting the secondary USB interface for a native

firmware update in the auxiliary scanner. To support previous firmware versions residing in flatbed scanners, this

parameter disables the native firmware interface. Changing this parameter requires modifying the USB descriptor,

and therefore reboots the device.

Scan Enable Native Firmware Update to enable the IBM flash interface.

*Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking

Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking

Enable Native Firmware Update

*Disable Native Firmware Update

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

8 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB Keystroke Delay

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer

delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.

USB CAPS Lock Override

This option applies only to the

USB Keyboard HID

device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of

the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows

(ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.

*No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

Override Caps Lock Key

(Enable)

*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key

(Disable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

USB Interface 8 - 9

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

This option applies only to the

USB Keyboard HID

and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host

does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for

unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.

Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending bar codes

containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for

USB Keyboard HID

devices to send the bar code

characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.

USB Convert Unknown to Code 39

This option applies only to the IBM Hand-Held, IBM Table-Top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following bar

codes to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39.

*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39

*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

8 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB Fast HID

Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit

USB HID

data at a faster rate.

NOTE Disable this if there are problems with transmission.

*Enable USB Fast HID

Disable USB Fast HID

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

USB Interface 8 - 11

USB Polling Interval

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the

scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.

NOTE When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.

IMPORTANT Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.

1 msec

2 msec

*3 msec

4 msec

5 msec

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

8 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB Polling Interval (continued)

6 msec

7 msec

8 msec

9 msec

10 msec

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

USB Interface 8 - 13

Keypad Emulation

Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad.

For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT Make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.

Quick Keypad Emulation

This option applies only to the

USB Keyboard HID

device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan Enable Quick

Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only

sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.

NOTE If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes on page B-1),

disable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 8-13 and enable Keypad Emulation.

*Enable Keypad Emulation

Disable Keypad Emulation

*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation

Disable Quick Keypad Emulation

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

8 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad

as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT Make” 0 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

This option applies only to the

USB Keyboard HID

device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to

replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 bar code with a user-selected Key Category and value.

See FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36 to set the Key Category and Key Value.

*Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

*Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

USB Interface 8 - 15

Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see Table I-1 on page I-1). Scan Enable

Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not

have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.

Simulated Caps Lock

Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock

state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.

Enable Function Key Mapping

*Disable Function Key Mapping

NOTE Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.

NOTE Do not enable this if USB CAPS Lock Override on page 8-8 is enabled.

Enable Simulated Caps Lock

*Disable Simulated Caps Lock

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

8 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Convert Case

Scan one of the following bar codes to convert all bar code data to the selected case.

USB Static CDC

When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1,

second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.)

When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.

NOTE Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.

*No Case Conversion

Convert All to Upper Case

Convert All to Lower Case

*Enable USB Static CDC

Disable USB Static CDC

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

USB Interface 8 - 17

CDC Beep on <BEL>

If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC

communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.

USB CDC Host Variant

Parameter # 1713

The USB Airline/Airport (CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) CDC host variant feature mimics the RS-232 host variant (CUTE)

feature and is supported over USB CDC host mode. The scanner transmits data in Airline/Airport

(CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) data format <Prefix><Data><Suffix>.

The USB Airline/Airport (CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) feature supports two CDC host variants; one for each Independent

Software Vendor (ISV) specification (namely, ARINC). The default USB CDC host variant is Standard CDC Host

Mode.

Lockout of Parameter Bar Code Scanning

If the scanner is configured as USB CDC Host Variant (other than CDC Standard), it disables all parameter bar

code scanning. The user can unlock it by scanning Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning on page 5-6.

Parameter Default

Enabling of any of the USB CDC Host Variants (other than CDC Standard) requires coercion of other parameters.

The scanner updates the parameters in Table 8-2 to the specified default values based on the USB CDC Host

Variant selected.

*Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>

Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>

*CDC Standard

CDC ARINC

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

8 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit Data Formatting

ARINC Format

Data is transmitted in the following format: <STX><DID><DOC><BID><DATA><ETX><CRC>

Where:

<STX> - 0x02

<DID> - 0xB1 (DTYP and DNUM)

<DOC> - 0x30 (Document Identifier)

<BID> - Bar code Identifier (Table 8-3)

<DATA> - Bar code decode data

<ETX> - 0x03

<CRC> - CRC-16

Table 8-2 Parameter Default for Airport Device Types

Parameter ARINC Defaults

IATA 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) Enabled

Parameter Scanning Disabled

IATA 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) lengths 6 to 55

I 2 of 5 Enabled

I 2 of 5 lengths 4 to 56

Micro PDF N/R

PDF417 Enabled

Code39 Enabled

Code128 Enabled

Triggered Same Symbol Timeout Enabled

Transmit Code ID Disabled

Table 8-3 ARINC Bar Code Identifier

Bar Code Type ASCII Value

Interleaved 2 of 5 1

Industrial 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) 2

Code 39 3

Code 128 5

Code 39 with check digit

* Note: Bar code types with check digits are currently not supported on the scanner for ARINC.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

USB Interface 8 - 19

TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep

The host can send a direct I/O beep request to the scanner. If you select Ignore Direct I/O Beep, the scanner does

not sound beeps on this command. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.

Industrial 2 of 5 with check digit

Interleaved 2 of 5 with check digit

2D Data Matrix 4

2D QR 7

2D PDF 6

EAN 13 with check digit

2D Aztec 8

All others None

Table 8-3 ARINC Bar Code Identifier (Continued)

Bar Code Type ASCII Value

* Note: Bar code types with check digits are currently not supported on the scanner for ARINC.

*Honor Direct IO Beep

Ignore Direct IO Beep

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 19

8 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive

The host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the

scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were

processed.

TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive

The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive to prevent the

scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were

processed.

Honor Beep Directive

*Ignore Beep Directive

Honor Bar Code Configuration Directive

*Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 20

USB Interface 8 - 21

TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version

Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown:

• Data Matrix

• GS1 Data Matrix

• QR Code

• GS1 QR

• MicroQR Code

• Aztec

Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.

ASCII Character Sets for USB

See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the following:

• ASCII Character Set (Table I-1 on page I-1)

• ALT Key Character Set (Table I-2 on page I-6)

• GUI Key Character Set (Table I-3 on page I-7)

• F Key Character Set (Table I-5 on page I-10).

IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)

*IBM Specification Level Version 2.2

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 21

8 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 22

CHAPTER 9 SSI INTERFACE

Introduction

This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a

communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners,

two-dimensional scanners, hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means for

the host to control the decoder or scanner.

Communication

All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol.

Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI.

The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper

SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any

transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum).

Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a

larger message (packeted).

SSI performs the following functions for the host device:

• Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner

• Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner

• Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.

The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a

power supply.

SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format

of the transmitted data.

The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host.

All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats

section. SSI Transactions on page 9-3 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

9 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Table 9-1 lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The

scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.

For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.

Table 9-1 SSI Commands

Name Type Opcode Description

AIM_OFF H 0xC4 Deactivate aim pattern.

AIM_ON H 0xC5 Activate aim pattern.

BEEP H 0xE6 Sound the beeper.

CAPABILITIES_REPLY D 0xD4 Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the

capabilities and commands the decoder supports.

CAPABILITIES_REQUEST H 0xD3 Request capabilities report from the decoder.

CMD_ACK H/D 0xD0 Positive acknowledgment of received packet.

CMD_NAK H/D 0xD1 Negative acknowledgment of received packet.

DECODE_DATA D 0xF3 Decode data in SSI packet format.

EVENT D 0xF6 Event indicated by associated event code.

LED_OFF H 0xE8 De-activate LED output.

LED_ON H 0xE7 Activate LED output.

PARAM_DEFAULTS H 0xC8 Set parameter default values.

PARAM_REQUEST H 0xC7 Request values of certain parameters.

PARAM_SEND H/D 0xC6 Send parameter values.

REPLY_REVISION D 0xA4 Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's

software/hardware configuration.

REQUEST_REVISION H 0xA3 Request the decoder's configuration.

SCAN_DISABLE H 0xEA Prevent the operator from scanning bar codes.

SCAN_ENABLE H 0xE9 Permit bar code scanning.

SLEEP H 0xEB Request to place the decoder into low power.

START_DECODE H 0xE4 Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a bar code.

STOP_DECODE H 0xE5 Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.

WAKEUP H N/A Wake the decoder from low power mode.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

SSI Interface 9 - 3

SSI Transactions

General Data Transactions

ACK/NAK Handshaking

If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK

response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking

enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since

they are not packeted data.

Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:

• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200.

• The scanner cannot interpret the message.

• The scanner does not implement the change the host requested.

• The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly.

• Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.

If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:

• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message.

• The scanner cannot interpret the message.

• The scanner CMD_NAKs the message.

• The host resends the message.

• The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter

changes.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

9 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decoded Data Transmission

The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to

send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.

ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data

The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable

timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times

before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry

depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.

ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted

data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.

NOTE When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of

the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.

Decoder

Data is captured

by decoder

Host

(1)

DECODE_DATA

(2)

CMD_ACK

message sent

Decoder

Data is captured

by decoder

Host

ASCII data

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

SSI Interface 9 - 5

ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA

In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK

handshaking parameter is disabled.

ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

The decoder sends captured data to the host.

Decoder

Data is captured

by decoder

Host

(1)

DECODE_DATA

message sent

Decoder

Data is captured

by decoder

Host

(1)

ASCII data sent

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

9 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Communication Summary

RTS/CTS Lines

All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s

Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before

all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra

recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.

ACK/NAK Option

ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause

communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly.

ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.

Number of Data Bits

All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.

Serial Response Timeout

The Host Serial Response Timeout parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before

trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.

Retries

The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK

handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a

NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte.

The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK

handshaking is enabled).

Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking

If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the

previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.

Errors

The scanner issues a communication error when:

• The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive

retries

• The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.

NOTE You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process an

ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited write

cycles of non-volatile memory.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

SSI Interface 9 - 7

SSI Communication Notes

• When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not communicate

with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.

• When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to

send two commands within the same handshaking frame.

• There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner

discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes

shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.

Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI

Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 5-12 provides options to select a general time delay. To program a more

specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 9-2.

Table 9-2 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power

Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout

0x00 15 Min 0x10 1 Sec 0x20 1 Min 0x30 1 Hour

0x01 30 Min 0x11 1 Sec 0x21 1 Min 0x31 1 Hour

0x02 60 Min 0x12 2 Sec 0x22 2 Min 0x32 2 Hours

0x03 90 Min 0x13 3 Sec 0x23 3 Min 0x33 3 Hours

N/A N/A 0x14 4 Sec 0x24 4 Min 0x34 4 Hours

N/A N/A 0x15 5 Sec 0x25 5 Min 0x35 5 Hours

N/A N/A 0x16 6 Sec 0x26 6 Min 0x36 6 Hours

N/A N/A 0x17 7 Sec 0x27 7 Min 0x37 7 Hours

N/A N/A 0x18 8 Sec 0x28 8 Min 0x38 8 Hours

N/A N/A 0x19 9 Sec 0x29 9 Min 0x39 9 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1A 10 Sec 0x2A 10 Min 0x3A 10 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1B 15 Sec 0x2B 15 Min 0x3B 15 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1C 20 Sec 0x2C 20 Min 0x3C 20 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1D 30 Sec 0x2D 30 Min 0x3D 30 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1E 45 Sec 0x2E 45 Min 0x3E 45 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1F 60 Sec 0x2F 60 Min 0x3F 60 Hours

CAUTION With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a

character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the

7 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 7 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

9 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI

The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a

provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must

fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.

Command Structure

The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that

do not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.

Response Structure

Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Length (not including the checksum)

1 SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)

2 Message Source (4 - Host)

3 Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit

4 Payload data (see the following example)

...

Length -1

Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)

Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)

Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Length (not including the checksum)

1 SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)

2 Message Source (0 - Decoder)

3 Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit

4 Payload data (see the following example)

...

Length -1

Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)

Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

SSI Interface 9 - 9

Example Transaction

The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting

(Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an

RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the

device.

Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device

0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E

Where:

• 0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header

• 00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command

• FD 4E is SSI command checksum

Response from Device with Packet Size Information

0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C

Where:

• 0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header

• 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response

• FD 6C is SSI response checksum

Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information

0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0

Where:

• 0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header

• 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal

• FE B0 is SSI command checksum

Response from Device with Diagnostic Information

21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15

Where:

• 21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI

command header

• 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report value

• FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination

• FC 15 is SSI response checksum

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

9 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Setting Parameters

This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via bar

code menu or SSI hosts commands.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 9-3 on page 9-11 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks (

*) indicate default values.

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan

the Baud Rate 19,200 bar code under Baud Rate on page 9-12. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the

LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

(1)

Feature/option

* Indicates default

Option value

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

SSI Interface 9 - 11

Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults

Table 9-1 lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

• Download data through the device’s serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this

chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying bar

codes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for detailed instructions for changing

parameters using this method.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 9-3 SSI Interface Default Table

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A

9-12

Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600

9-12

Parity 158 9Eh None

9-14

Check Parity 151 97h Disable

9-15

Stop Bits 157 9Dh 1

9-15

Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK

9-16

Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low

9-17

Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode Data

9-17

Host Serial Response Timeout 155 9Bh 2 Seconds

9-18

Host Character Timeout 239 EFh 200 msec

9-19

Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Option 1

9-20

Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh 0 msec

9-21

Event Reporting

Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable

9-22

Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable

9-23

Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable

9-23

NOTE SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in Table I-1 on page I-1 differently than other

interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of

7013 is interpreted as CR only.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

9 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host

To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following bar code.

Baud Rate

Parameter # 156

SSI # 9Ch

Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the

scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host

device or may reach it in distorted form.

SSI Host

*Baud Rate 9600

(6)

Baud Rate 19,200

(7)

Baud Rate 38,400

(8)

Baud Rate 57,600

(10)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

SSI Interface 9 - 13

Baud Rate (continued)

Baud Rate 115,200

(11)

Baud Rate 230,400

(13)

Baud Rate 460,800

(14)

Baud Rate 921,600

(15)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

9 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Parity

Parameter # 158

SSI # 9Eh

A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following bar codes to

select the parity type according to host device requirements:

• Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an

odd number of 1 bits.

• Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an

even number of 1 bits.

• None - No parity bit is required.

Odd

(2)

Even

(1)

*None

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

SSI Interface 9 - 15

Check Parity

Parameter # 151

SSI # 97h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to check the parity of received characters. See Parity to

select the type of parity.

Stop Bits

Parameter # 157

SSI # 9Dh

The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and

prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following bar codes

to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.

*Do Not Check Parity

(0)

Check Parity

(1)

*1 Stop Bit

(1)

2 Stop Bits

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

9 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Software Handshaking

Parameter # 159

SSI # 9Fh

This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers.

Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it.

Options:

• Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking

packets.

• Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK

response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.

The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the

scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the data

and declaring a transmission error.

Disable ACK/NAK

(0)

*Enable ACK/NAK

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

SSI Interface 9 - 17

Host RTS Line State

Parameter # 154

SSI # 9Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line.

The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the

scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host

PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 9-17). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be

asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High bar code to address

this problem.

Decode Data Packet Format

Parameter # 238

SSI # EEh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with

the packet format defined by the serial protocol.

Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.

*Low

(0)

High

(1)

*Send Raw Decode Data

(0)

Send Packeted Decode Data

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

9 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Host Serial Response Timeout

Parameter # 155

SSI # 9Bh

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending.

Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits

for the designated timeout before declaring an error.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Low - 2 Seconds

(20)

Medium - 5 Seconds

(50)

High - 7.5 Seconds

(75)

Maximum - 9.9 Seconds

(99)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

SSI Interface 9 - 19

Host Character Timeout

Parameter # 239

SSI # EFh

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters

transmitted by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Low - 200 msec

(20)

Medium - 500 msec

(50)

High - 750 msec

(75)

Maximum - 990 msec

(99)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 19

9 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Multipacket Option

Parameter # 334

SSI # F0h 4Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions:

• Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet

transmission.

• Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to

pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner

transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.

• Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket delay.

See Interpacket Delay on page 9-21 to set this delay.

*Multipacket Option 1

(0)

Multipacket Option 2

(1)

Multipacket Option 3

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 20

SSI Interface 9 - 21

Interpacket Delay

Parameter # 335

SSI # F0h 4Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Minimum - 0 msec

(0)

Low - 25 msec

(25)

Medium - 50 msec

(50)

High - 75 msec

(75)

Maximum - 99 msec

(99)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 21

9 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Event Reporting

The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the

following bar codes to enable or disable the events listed in Table 9-4 and on the following pages.

Decode Event

Parameter # 256

SSI # F0h 00h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Decode Event.

• Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful bar code decode.

• Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.

Table 9-4 Event Codes

Event Class Event Code Reported

Decode Event Non-parameter decode 0x01

Boot Up Event System power-up 0x03

Parameter Event Parameter entry error 0x07

Parameter stored 0x08

Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default) 0x0A

Number expected 0x0F

Enable Decode Event

(1)

*Disable Decode Event

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 22

SSI Interface 9 - 23

Boot Up Event

Parameter # 258

SSI # F0h 02h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Boot Up Event:

• Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied.

• Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.

Parameter Event

Parameter # 259

SSI # F0h 03h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Parameter Event:

• Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events specified

in Table 9-4 on page 9-22 occurs.

• Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.

Enable Boot Up Event

(1)

*Disable Boot Up Event

(0)

Enable Parameter Event

(1)

*Disable Parameter Event

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 23

9 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 24

CHAPTER 10 RS-232 INTERFACE

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with an RS-232 host. The cradle can use the RS-232 interface to

connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port).

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 10-1 on page 10-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

If your host does not appear in Table 10-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication

parameters to match the host.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks (

*) indicate default values.

NOTE The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system

architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C

conversion. Contact the Zebra Support & Downloads website for more information.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

Feature/option

* Indicates default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

10 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan

the Baud Rate 19,200 bar code under Baud Rate on page 10-8. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the

LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Connecting an RS-232 Interface

Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.

Figure 10-1 RS-232 Connection

1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle.

2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.

3. If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power

supply into an appropriate outlet.

Serial port

connector

to host

Interface cable

Power supply

NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in

Figure 10-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

RS-232 Interface 10 - 3

4. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does

not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from

RS-232 Host Types on page 10-6.

5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 4-3.

RS-232 Parameter Defaults

Table 10-1 lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

•

Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

•

Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software

Tools.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 10-1 RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults

Parameter Default

Page

Number

RS-232 Host Parameters

RS-232 Host Types Standard

10-6

Baud Rate 9600

10-8

Parity None

10-9

Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit

10-9

Data Bits 8-bit

10-10

Check Receive Errors Enable

10-10

Hardware Handshaking None

10-11

Software Handshaking None

10-13

Host Serial Response Timeout 2 Sec

10-15

RTS Line State Low RTS

10-16

Beep on <BEL> Disable

10-16

Intercharacter Delay 0 msec

10-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation

10-18

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Send Bar Code With Unknown

Characters

10-18

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

10 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Host Parameters

Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf

Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment

(CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 10-2.

Table 10-2 Terminal Specific RS-232

Parameter ICL Fujitsu

Wincor-

Nixdorf

Mode A

Wincor-

Nixdorf Mode

B/OPOS/JPOS

Olivetti Omron CUTE

Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Data Transmission

Format

Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/

Suffix

Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/

Suffix

Suffix CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013) CR (1013)

ETX (1003)

Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600

Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even

Hardware

Handshaking

RTS/CTS

Option 3

None RTS/CTS

Option 3

RTS/CTS

Option 3

None None None

Software

Handshaking

None None None None ACK/NAK None None

Serial Response

Timeout

9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. None None 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.

Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One

ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit

Beep On <BEL> Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

RTS Line State High Low Low Low = No data to

send

Low High High

Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX (1002)

In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.

If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear

unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the

scanner.

The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan

*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 5-6, then change the host selection.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

RS-232 Interface 10 - 5

RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)

Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or

CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers transmits the code ID characters listed in Table 10-3. These code ID characters are

not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID

feature for these terminals.

Table 10-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters

Code Type ICL Fujitsu

Wincor-

Nixdorf

Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf

Mode B/

OPOS/JPOS

Olivetti Omron CUTE

UPC-A A A A A A A A

UPC-E E E C C C E None

EAN-8/JAN-8 FF FF B B B FF None

EAN-13/JAN-13 F F A A A F A

Code 39 C <len> None M M M <len> C <len> 3

Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3

Codabar N <len> None N N N <len> N <len> None

Code 128 L <len> None K K K <len> L <len> 5

I 2 of 5 I <len> None I I I <len> I <len> 1

Code 93 None None L L L <len> None None

D 2 of 5 H <len> None H H H <len> H <len> 2

GS1-128 L <len> None P P P <len> L <len> 5

MSI None None O O O <len> None None

Bookland EAN F F A A A F None

Trioptic None None None None None None None

Code 11 None None None None None None None

IATA H<len> None H H H<len> H<len> 2

Code 32 None None None None None None None

GS1 DataBar

Variants

None None E E None None None

PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6

Data Matrix None None R R None None 4

GS1 Data Matrix None None W W None None None

QR Codes None None U U None None 7

GS1 QR None None X X None None None

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

10 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Host Types

To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.

Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits,

handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type bar code changes these settings.

Aztec/Aztec Rune None None V V None None 8

Maxicode None None T T None None None

MicroPDF None None S S None None 6

Table 10-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)

Code Type ICL Fujitsu

Wincor-

Nixdorf

Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf

Mode B/

OPOS/JPOS

Olivetti Omron CUTE

NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see

Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.

*Standard RS-232

ICL RS-232

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

RS-232 Interface 10 - 7

RS-232 Host Types (continued)

The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan

*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 5-6, and then change the host selection.

Olivetti ORS4500

Omron

OPOS/JPOS

Fujitsu RS-232

CUTE

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

10 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Baud Rate

Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the

scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host

device or may reach it in distorted form.

NOTE The scanner does not support baud rates below 9600.

*Baud Rate 9600

Baud Rate 19,200

Baud Rate 38,400

Baud Rate 57,600

Baud Rate 115,200

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

RS-232 Interface 10 - 9

Parity

A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following bar codes to

select the parity type according to host device requirements:

•

Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an

odd number of 1 bits.

•

Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an

even number of 1 bits.

•

None - No parity bit is required.

Stop Bits

The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and

prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following bar codes

to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.

Odd

Even

*None

*1 Stop Bit

2 Stop Bits

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

10 - 10DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Data Bits

This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.

Check Receive Errors

Scan one of the following bar codes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters.

The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 10-9.

7-bit

*8-bit

*Check For Received Errors

Do Not Check For Received Errors

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

RS-232 Interface10 - 11

Hardware Handshaking

The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking

lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).

If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.

Options:

•

None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available.

•

Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data

according to the following sequence:

a. The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:

• If the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response

Timeout on page 10-15 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the

timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.

• If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to de-assert

CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards

the scanned data.

b. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.

c. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.

During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds

a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.

•

RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The

scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.

•

RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner waits

for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the Host Serial Response

Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. During data transmission, if CTS is

de-asserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the

data.

•

RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence:

a. The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS.

b. The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits

data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error

and discards the data.

c. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.

d. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.

During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds

a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.

NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

10 - 12DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Hardware Handshaking (continued)

*None

Standard RTS/CTS

RTS/CTS Option 1

RTS/CTS Option 2

RTS/CTS Option 3

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

RS-232 Interface10 - 13

Software Handshaking

This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware

handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes

precedence.

Options:

•

None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.

•

ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it

receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful

attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.

The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the

scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There are no

reattempts.

•

ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive

an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the

data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent

transmission errors.

•

ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to

re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.

•

XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.

There are two situations for XON/XOFF:

• The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to the

Host Serial Response Timeout for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the XON

within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.

• The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the current

byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner waits

indefinitely for the XON.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

10 - 14DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Software Handshaking (continued)

*None

ACK/NAK

ENQ

ACK/NAK with ENQ

XON/XOFF

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

RS-232 Interface10 - 15

Host Serial Response Timeout

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before

determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software

handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.

*Minimum: 2 Seconds

Low: 2.5 Seconds

Medium: 5 Seconds

High: 7.5 Seconds

Maximum: 9.9 Seconds

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

10 - 16DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

RTS Line State

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS.

Beep on <BEL>

Scan one of the following bar codes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character

on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.

*Host: Low RTS

Host: High RTS

Beep On <BEL> Character

(Enable)

*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character

(Disable)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

RS-232 Interface10 - 17

Intercharacter Delay

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.

*Minimum: 0 msec

Low: 25 msec

Medium: 50 msec

High: 75 msec

Maximum: 99 msec

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

10 - 18DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following bar codes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns

on its LED after a decode.

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown

Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.

Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown

character. The scanner issues an error beep.

ASCII Character Set for RS-232

See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for Prefix/Suffix values. The values in Table I-1 can be assigned as prefixes

or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.

*Normal Operation

(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)

Beep/LED After Transmission

Beep/LED After CTS Pulse

*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

CHAPTER 11 IBM 468X / 469X

INTERFACE

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with an IBM 468X/469X host.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 11-1 on page 11-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan

the Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) bar code under Port Address on page 11-4. The scanner issues a

fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

Feature/option* Indicates default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

11 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host

Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.

Figure 11-1 IBM Connection

1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle.

2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).

3. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate

bar code from Port Address on page 11-4 to select the port address.

4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 4-3.

Host port

connector

Interface cable

NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in

Figure 11-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.

NOTE The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other scanner

parameters.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

IBM 468X / 469X Interface 11 - 3

IBM Parameter Defaults

Table 11-1 lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 2, 123Scan and Software

Tools.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 11-1 IBM Parameter Defaults

Parameter Default

Page

Number

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters

Port Address None

11-4

Convert Unknown to Code 39

Disable 11-5

RS-485 Beep Directive Ignore

11-5

RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive Ignore

11-6

IBM-485 Specification Version Original Specification

11-6

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

11 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

IBM Host Parameters

Port Address

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the IBM 468X/469X port.

NOTE Scanning a Port Address bar code enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.

NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see

Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.

*None

Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)

Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)

Table-Top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

IBM 468X / 469X Interface 11 - 5

Convert Unknown to Code 39

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39.

RS-485 Beep Directive

The IBM RS-485 host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to

prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they

were processed.

Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39

*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39

Honor Beep Directive

*Ignore Beep Directive

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

11 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive

The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive to

prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host

as if they were processed.

IBM-485 Specification Version

Parameter # 1729 (SSI # F8h 06h C1h)

The IBM interface specification version selected defines how code types are reported over the IBM interface.

When you scan Original Specification, only Symbologies that were historically supported on each individual port

are reported as known. When you scan Version 2.2, all Symbologies covered in the newer IBM specification are

reported as known with their respective code types.

Honor Bar Code Configuration Directive

*Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive

*Original Specification

(0)

Version 2.2

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

CHAPTER 12 KEYBOARD WEDGE

INTERFACE

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the cradle. The cradle connects between the

keyboard and host computer and translates bar code data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they

originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual

keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 12-1 on page 12-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters

for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

To return all features to default values, scan a bar code in Default Parameters on page 5-5. Throughout the

programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*) indicate default values.

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay,

scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) bar code under Keystroke Delay on page 12-5. The scanner issues a fast

warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

Feature/option* Indicates default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

12 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface

Figure 12-1 Keyboard Wedge Connection

1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.

2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the cradle.

3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.

4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.

5. If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.

6. Ensure that all connections are secure.

7. Turn on the host system.

8. The digital scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*)

does not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 12-4.

9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide.

If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 4-3.

Male DIN connectors

Keyboard

connector

NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in

Figure 12-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Keyboard Wedge Interface 12 - 3

Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults

Table 12-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar

code(s) in Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 12-4.

NOTE See Appendix B, Country Codes for Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes).

See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 12-1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table

Parameter Default Page Number

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM AT Notebook

12-4

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

12-4

Keystroke Delay No Delay

12-5

Intra-keystroke Delay Disable

12-5

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Enable

12-6

Quick Keypad Emulation Enable

12-6

Simulated Caps Lock Disable

12-7

Caps Lock Override Disable

12-7

Convert Case Do Not Convert

12-8

Function Key Mapping Disable

12-8

FN1 Substitution Disable

12-9

Send Make and Break Send

12-9

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

12 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Types

Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown

Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.

Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown

character. The scanner issues an error beep.

NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see

Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.

IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles

*IBM AT Notebook

*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Keyboard Wedge Interface 12 - 5

Keystroke Delay

This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following bar codes to increase the

delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.

Intra-keystroke Delay

Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release.

This also sets Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.

*No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

Enable Intra-keystroke Delay

*Disable Intra-keystroke Delay

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

12 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation

This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Appendix B, Country Codes in a

Microsoft

operating system environment.

Quick Keypad Emulation

This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on

the keyboard.

NOTE If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see USB and Keyboard Wedge Country

Keyboard Types (Country Codes) on page B-2), disable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 12-6 and

ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 12-6 is enabled.

*Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad

Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad

NOTE This option applies only when Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.

*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation

Disable Quick Keypad Emulation

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Keyboard Wedge Interface 12 - 7

Simulated Caps Lock

Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is

enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state. Note that Simulated

Caps Lock applies to ASCII alpha characters only.

Caps Lock Override

Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the

state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the bar code transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the setting of the

keyboard’s Caps Lock key.

Enable Caps Lock

*Disable Caps Lock

Enable Caps Lock Override

*Disable Caps Lock Override

NOTE If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

12 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Convert Case

Scan one of the following bar codes to convert all bar code data to the selected case.

Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table I-1 on page I-1). Scan Enable

Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not

have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.

NOTE Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.

Convert to Upper Case

Convert to Lower Case

*Do Not Convert

Enable Function Key Mapping

*Disable Function Key Mapping

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Keyboard Wedge Interface 12 - 9

FN1 Substitution

Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a user-selected keystroke

(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36).

Send Make and Break

Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.

Enable FN1 Substitution

*Disable FN1 Substitution

*Send Make and Break Scan Codes

Send Make Scan Code Only

NOTE Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

12 - 10DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Map

The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix

values, see the bar codes on page 5-33.

Figure 12-2 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard

ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge

See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the following:

• ASCII Character Set (Table I-1 on page I-1)

• ALT Key Character Set (Table I-2 on page I-6)

• GUI Key Character Set (Table I-3 on page I-7)

• F Key Character Set (Table I-5 on page I-10)

• Numeric Key Character Set (Table I-6 on page I-11)

• Extended Key Character Set (Table I-7 on page I-12).

7013

7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010

7013

5011

7010 7007

7006

7001

5012

7008

7009

7011

7012

7003

7002 7004 7005

7017 7016

7015

7018

NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and

assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B,

it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

CHAPTER 13 SYMBOLOGIES

Introduction

You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes

symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 13-1 on page 13-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

Setting Parameters

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile

memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.

If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up

beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5. Throughout the programming bar

code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,

be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars

and/or spaces do not merge.

*Enable Parameter

Feature/option* Indicates default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

13 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the

UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

on page 13-18. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter

entry.

Other parameters, such as Set Lengths for D 2 of 5, require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter

descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Symbology Parameter Defaults

Table 13-1 lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in

memory. To recall the default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 5-5.

• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan

configuration program. See Chapter 13, Symbologies.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and

miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

Enable/Disable All Code Types

13-8

1D Symbologies

UPC/EAN/JAN

UPC-A 1 01h Enable 13-9

UPC-E 2 02h Enable 13-9

UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 13-10

EAN-8/JAN 8 4 04h Enable 13-10

EAN-13/JAN 13 3 03h Enable 13-11

Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 13-11

Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 13-12

ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 13-12

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Symbologies 13 - 3

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(2 and 5 digits)

16 10h Ignore 13-13

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1:

Supplemental 2:

579

580

F1h 43h

F1h 44h

000 13-16

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80 50h 10 13-16

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM

ID Format

672 F1h A0h Combined 13-17

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 13-18

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 13-18

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 13-19

Transmit Ean-8 Check Digit 1881 F8 07 59h Enable 13-19

Transmit Ean-13 Check Digit 1882 F8 07 5Ah Enable 13-20

UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 13-21

UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 13-22

UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 13-23

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A 37 25h Disable 13-24

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A 38 26h Disable 13-24

EAN/JAN Zero Extend 39 27h Disable 13-25

UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 13-25

Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon

Format

13-26

UPC Reduced Quiet Zone 1289 F8h 05h 09h Disable 13-26

Code 128

Code 128 8 08h Enable 13-27

Set Lengths for Code 128 209, 210 D1h, D2h 1 - 55 13-27

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 13-28

ISBT 128 84 54h Disable 13-29

ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 13-30

Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 13-31

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

13 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 13-31

Code 128 <FNC4> 1254 F8h 04h E6h Honor 13-32

Code 128 Security Level 751 F1h EFh Security Level 1 13-32

Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone 1208 F8h 04h B8h Disable 13-33

Code 39

Code 39 0 00h Enable 13-34

Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 13-34

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(Italian Pharmacy Code)

86 56h Disable 13-35

Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 13-35

Set Lengths for Code 39 18, 19 12h, 13h 1 - 55 13-36

Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 30h Disable 13-37

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 13-38

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 13-38

Code 39 Security Level 750 F1h EEh Security Level 1 13-39

Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone 1209 F8h 04h B9h Disable 13-41

Code 93

Code 93 9 09h Enable 13-41

Set Lengths for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah, 1Bh 1 - 55 13-42

Code 11

Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 13-44

Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 13-44

Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 34h Disable 13-46

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 13-47

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5)

Interleaved 2 of 5 6 06h Enable 13-47

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 22, 23 16h, 17h 6 to 55 13-48

Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 13-50

Transmit Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 13-51

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Symbologies 13 - 5

Convert Interleaved 2 of 5 to EAN-13 82 52h Disable 13-51

Febraban 1750 F8h 06h D6h Disable 13-52

Interleaved 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1 13-53

Interleaved 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone 1210 F8h 04h BAh Disable 13-54

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5)

Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 13-54

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 1 to 55 13-55

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar 7 07h Enable 13-57

Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h, 19h 4 to 55 13-57

CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 13-59

NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 13-59

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/

Stop Characters Detection

855 F2h 57h Upper Case 13-60

Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit 1784 F8h 06h F8h Disable 13-60

Transmit Codabar Check Digit 704 F1h C0h Disable 13-61

MSI

MSI 11 0Bh Disable 13-61

Set Lengths for MSI 30, 31 1Eh, 1Fh 4 to 55 13-62

MSI Check Digits 50 32h One 13-64

Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 13-64

MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-65

MSI Reduced Quiet Zone 1392 F8h 05h 70h Disable

13-65

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 13-66

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 13-66

Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619

620

F1h 6Bh

F1h 6Ch

4 to 55 13-67

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

13 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 13-68

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 13-69

Korean 3 of 5

Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 13-69

Inverse 1D

586 F1h 4Ah Regular 13-70

GS1 DataBar

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly

GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,

GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar

Stacked Omnidirectional

338 F0h 52h Enable 13-71

GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 13-71

GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar

Expanded Stacked

340 F0h 54h Enable 13-72

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN 397 F0h 8Dh Disable 13-72

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728 F1h D8h

Level 3 13-73

GS1 DataBar Security Level 1706 F8h 06h AAh

Level 1 13-74

Symbology-Specific Security Features

Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 13-75

Security Level 77 4Dh 1 13-77

1D Quiet Zone Level 1288 F8h 05h 08h 1 13-78

Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 13-79

Composite Codes

Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 13-79

Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 13-80

Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 13-80

Composite Inverse 1113 F8h 04h 59h Regular Only

13-81

UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h UPC Never Linked 13-82

Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each

Code Type is

Decoded

13-83

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Symbologies 13 - 7

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN

Composite Codes

427 F0h ABh Disable 13-83

2D Symbologies

PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 13-84

MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 13-84

Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 13-85

Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 13-86

GS1 Data Matrix 1336 F8h 05h 38h Disable 13-86

Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch Inverse Autodetect 13-87

Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537 F1h 19h Auto 13-88

Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 13-89

QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 13-89

GS1 QR 1343 F8h 05h 3Fh Disable 13-90

MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 13-90

Weblink QR 1947 F8 07 9Bh Enable 13-91

Linked QR 1847 737h Linked QR Only 13-92

Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 13-93

Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 13-93

Han Xin 1167 F8h 04h 8Fh Disable 13-94

Han Xin Inverse 1168 F8h 04h 90h Regular 13-94

Grid Matrix 1718 F8 06 B6 Disable 13-95

Grid Matrix Inverse 1719 F8 06 B7 Regular Only 13-95

Grid Matrix Mirror 1736 F8 06 C8 Regular Only 13-96

DotCode 1906 F8 07 72h Disable 13-97

DotCode Inverse 1907 F8 07 73h Autodetect 13-98

DotCode Mirrored 1908 F8 07 74h Autodetect 13-99

DotCode Prioritize 1937 F8 07 91h Enable 13-100

DotCode Erasure Limit 2063 F8 08 0F 10 13-100

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

13 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Enable/Disable All Code Types

Scan the Disable All Code Types bar code to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few

code types.

Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code

types.

Postal Codes

US Postnet 89 59h Disable 13-102

US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 13-102

Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 13-103

UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 13-103

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 13-104

Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 13-104

Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 13-105

Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 13-106

Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 13-107

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail 592 F1h 50h Disable 13-107

UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 13-108

Mailmark 1337 F8h 05h 39h Disable 13-108

Table 13-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number

Default

Page

Number

1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.

2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.

Disable All Code Types

Enable All Code Types

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Symbologies 13 - 9

UPC/EAN/JAN

UPC-A

Parameter # 1

SSI # 01h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-A.

UPC-E

Parameter # 2

SSI # 02h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-E.

*Enable UPC-A

(1)

Disable UPC-A

(0)

*Enable UPC-E

(1)

Disable UPC-E

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

13 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC-E1

Parameter # 12

SSI # 0Ch

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-E1.

EAN-8/JAN-8

Parameter # 4

SSI # 04h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8.

NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.

Enable UPC-E1

(1)

*Disable UPC-E1

(0)

*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8

(1)

Disable EAN-8/JAN-8

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Symbologies 13 - 11

EAN-13/JAN-13

Parameter # 3

SSI # 03h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13.

Bookland EAN

Parameter # 83

SSI # 53h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.

*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13

(1)

Disable EAN-13/JAN-13

(0)

Enable Bookland EAN

(1)

*Disable Bookland EAN

(0)

NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format. Also set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

on page 13-13 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN

With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

13 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Bookland ISBN Format

Parameter # 576

SSI # F1h 40h

If you enabled Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 13-11, select one of the following formats for Bookland

data:

• Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with

the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered

Bookland in this mode.

• Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in

13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.

ISSN EAN

Parameter # 617

SSI # F1h 69h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.

*Bookland ISBN-10

(0)

Bookland ISBN-13

(1)

NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 13-11,

and then set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 13-13 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with

Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979

Supplemental Mode.

Enable ISSN EAN

(1)

*Disable ISSN EAN

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Symbologies 13 - 13

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

Parameter # 16

SSI # 10h

Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2,

EAN-13+2). The following options are available:

• Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols

with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.

• Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental

symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.

• Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols

with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must

decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-16

before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.

Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 bar codes starting

with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner

must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page

13-16 before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits

UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.

• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed

previously.

• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit

user-defined prefix. Set this using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-16.

• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of

two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-16.

• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any

prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-16.

• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with

any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable

Supplementals on page 13-16.

NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Bookland EAN

on page 13-11 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 13-12.

NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental

characters.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

13 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only

(1)

*Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(0)

Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals

(2)

Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

(4)

Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

(5)

Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

(7)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

Symbologies 13 - 15

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

(6)

Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

(8)

Enable Smart Supplemental Mode

(3)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1

(9)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2

(10)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1

(11)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2

(12)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

13 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579

SSI # F1h 43h

Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580

SSI # F1h 44h

If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page

13-13, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 1, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric

Bar Codes to set the 3-digit prefix. To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2, and

then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. The default is 000 (zeroes).

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Parameter # 80

SSI # 50h

If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals, this option sets the number of times to

decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to 30. Five or above is

recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals.

The default is 10.

To set a redundancy value, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric

Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel

on page G-3.

User-Programmable Supplemental 1

User-Programmable Supplemental 2

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

Symbologies 13 - 17

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format

Parameter # 672

SSI # F1h A0h

If Transmit Code ID Character on page 5-32 is set to AIM Code ID Character, scan one of the following bar codes to

select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes with supplementals:

•

Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.,

]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]

• Combined – Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.,

]E3<data+supplemental data>

• Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate

transmissions, i.e.,

]E<0 or 4><data>

]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]

Separate

(0)

*Combined

(1)

Separate Transmissions

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

13 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Parameter # 40

SSI # 28h

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the

integrity of the data.

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Parameter # 41

SSI # 29h

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the

integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(0)

*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

Symbologies 13 - 19

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

Parameter # 42

SSI # 2Ah

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee

the integrity of the data.

Transmit EAN-8 Check Digit

Parameter # 1881

SSI # F8 07 59h

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the EAN-8 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the

integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(0)

*Transmit EAN-8 Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit EAN-8 Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 19

13 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit EAN-13 Check Digit

Parameter # 1882

SSI # F8 07 5Ah

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the EAN-13 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the

integrity of the data.

*Transmit EAN-13 Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit EAN-13 Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 20

Symbologies 13 - 21

UPC-A Preamble

Parameter # 34

SSI # 22h

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the

appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:

• Transmit System Character only

• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)

• Transmit no preamble.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*System Character

(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 21

13 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC-E Preamble

Parameter # 35

SSI # 23h

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the

appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:

• Transmit System Character only

• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)

• Transmit no preamble.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*System Character

(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 22

Symbologies 13 - 23

UPC-E1 Preamble

Parameter # 36

SSI # 24h

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the

appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:

• Transmit System Character only

• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)

• Transmit no preamble.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*System Character

(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 23

13 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A

Parameter # 37

SSI # 25h

Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After

conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,

Check Digit).

Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A

Parameter # 38

SSI # 26h

Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before

transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections

(e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).

Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without

conversion.

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 24

Symbologies 13 - 25

EAN/JAN Zero Extend

Parameter # 39

SSI # 27h

Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them

compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.

UCC Coupon Extended Code

Parameter # 85

SSI # 55h

Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes

starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to

use this feature.

Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(1)

*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(0)

Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(1)

*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(0)

NOTE See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-16 to control autodiscrimination of the

GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 25

13 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Coupon Report

Parameter # 730

SSI # F1h DAh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the type of coupon format to support.

• Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128.

• New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar.

• Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.

UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1289

SSI # F8h 05h 09h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding UPC bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the

margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 13-78.

Old Coupon Format

(0)

*New Coupon Format

(1)

Autodiscriminate Coupon Format

(2)

Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)

*Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 26

Symbologies 13 - 27

Code 128

Parameter # 8

SSI # 08h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 128.

Set Lengths for Code 128

L1 = Parameter # 209

SSI # D1h

L2 = Parameter # 210

SSI # D2h

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 80. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 1 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14

characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct

an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

*Enable Code 128

(1)

Disable Code 128

(0)

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 27

13 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)

• Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s

capability.

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)

Parameter # 14

SSI # 0Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1-128.

Code 128 - One Discrete Length

Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths

*Code 128 - Length Within Range

(Default: 1 - 55)

Code 128 - Any Length

*Enable GS1-128

(1)

Disable GS1-128

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 28

Symbologies 13 - 29

ISBT 128

Parameter # 84

SSI # 54h

ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or

disable ISBT 128.

Enable ISBT 128

(1)

*Disable ISBT 128

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 29

13 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ISBT Concatenation

Parameter # 577

SSI # F1h 41h

Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:

• Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and

perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.

• Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters.

• Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes

immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of

times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 13-31 before transmitting its data to confirm that

there is no additional ISBT symbol.

Enable ISBT Concatenation

(1)

*Disable ISBT Concatenation

(0)

Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 30

Symbologies 13 - 31

Check ISBT Table

Parameter # 578

SSI # F1h 42h

The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs.

If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this

table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Parameter # 223

SSI # DFh

If ISBT Concatenation on page 13-30 is set to Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation, you can set the number of

times the scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol. To do so,

scan ISBT Concatenation Redundancy below and then scan bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes to set

a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection,

scan Cancel on page G-3. The default is 10.

*Enable Check ISBT Table

(1)

Disable Check ISBT Table

(0)

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 31

13 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 128 <FNC4>

Parameter # 1254

SSI # F8h 04h E6h

This feature applies to Code 128 bar codes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128

<FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host

unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.

Code 128 Security Level

Parameter # 751

SSI # F1h EFh

Code 128 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length. The

scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between

security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so

select only the level of security necessary.

• Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient

security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.

• Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable

aggressiveness.

• Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1

fails to eliminate misdecodes.

• Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this

security level to apply the highest safety requirements.

*Honor Code 128 <FNC4>

(0)

Ignore Code 128 <FNC4>

(1)

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and

significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve

the quality of the bar codes.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 32

Symbologies 13 - 33

Code 128 Security Level (continued)

Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1208

SSI # F8h 04h B8h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 bar codes with reduced quiet zones

(the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 13-78.

Code 128Security Level 0

(0)

*Code 128 Security Level 1

(1)

Code 128 Security Level 2

(2)

Code 128 Security Level 3

(3)

Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)

*Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 33

13 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 39

Parameter # 0

SSI # 00h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 39.

Trioptic Code 39

Parameter # 13

SSI # 0Dh

Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols

always contain six characters. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable

Trioptic Code 39.

*Enable Code 39

(1)

Disable Code 39

(0)

Enable Trioptic Code 39

(1)

*Disable Trioptic Code 39

(0)

NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 34

Symbologies 13 - 35

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

Parameter # 86

SSI # 56h

Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following bar codes to

enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.

Code 32 Prefix

Parameter # 231

SSI # E7h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes.

NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(1)

*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(0)

NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Code 32 Prefix

(1)

*Disable Code 32 Prefix

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 35

13 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 39

L1 = Parameter # 18

SSI # 12h

L2 = Parameter # 19

SSI # 13h

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. Minimum

and maximum length range is from 0 - 80. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 1 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14

characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Code 39 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 36

Symbologies 13 - 37

Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 48

SSI # 30h

Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies

with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded.

Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.

Code 39 - One Discrete Length

Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths

*Code 39 - Length Within Range

(Default: 1 - 55)

Code 39 - Any Length

Enable Code 39 Check Digit

(1)

*Disable Code 39 Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 37

13 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Parameter # 43

SSI # 2Bh

Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Parameter # 17

SSI # 11h

Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one

of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Code 39 Full ASCII

(1)

*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII

(0)

NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.

Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII

character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table I-1 on page I-1.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 38

Symbologies 13 - 39

Code 39 Security Level

Parameter # 750

SSI # F1h EEh

The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between

security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so

select only the level of security necessary.

• Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient

security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.

• Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.

• Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1

fails to eliminate misdecodes.

• Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to

apply the highest safety requirements.

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and

significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve

the quality of the bar codes.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 39

13 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 39 Security Level (continued)

Code 39 Security Level 0

(0)

*Code 39 Security Level 1

(1)

Code 39 Security Level 2

(2)

Code 39 Security Level 3

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 40

Symbologies 13 - 41

Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1209

SSI # F8h 04h B9h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 bar codes with reduced quiet zones

(the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 13-78.

Code 93

Parameter # 9

SSI # 09h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 93.

Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)

*Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)

*Enable Code 93

(1)

Disable Code 93

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 41

13 - 42 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 93 (continued)

Set Lengths for Code 93

L1 = Parameter # 26

SSI # 1Ah

L2 = Parameter # 27

SSI # 1Bh

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 1 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14

characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Code 93 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 93 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 42

Symbologies 13 - 43

Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)

Code 93 - One Discrete Length

Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths

*Code 93 - Length Within Range

(Default: 1 - 55)

Code 93 - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 43

13 - 44 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 11

Parameter # 10

SSI # 0Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 11

Set Lengths for Code 11

L1 = Parameter # 28

SSI # 1Ch

L2 = Parameter # 29

SSI # 1Dh

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 4 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14

characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

Enable Code 11

(1)

*Disable Code 11

(0)

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 44

Symbologies 13 - 45

Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Code 11 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 11 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

Code 11 - One Discrete Length

Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths

*Code 11 - Length Within Range

(Default: 4 - 55)

Code 11 - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 45

13 - 46 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 52

SSI # 34h

This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with

the specified check digit algorithm.

Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to

disable this feature.

*Disable

(0)

One Check Digit

(1)

Two Check Digits

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 46

Symbologies 13 - 47

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits

Parameter # 47

SSI # 2Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5)

Parameter # 6

SSI # 06h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable I 2 of 5.

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

*Enable I 2 of 5

(1)

Disable I 2 of 5

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 47

13 - 48 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5

L1 = Parameter # 22

SSI # 16h

L2 = Parameter # 23

SSI # 17h

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 6 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14

characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the

code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this,

select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications, or

increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 13-53.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 48

Symbologies 13 - 49

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)

I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

*I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

(Default: 6 - 55)

I 2 of 5 - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 49

13 - 50 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 49

SSI # 31h

Scan one of the following bar codes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with

either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check

digit algorithm.

*Disable

(0)

USS Check Digit

(1)

OPCC Check Digit

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 50

Symbologies 13 - 51

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 44

SSI # 2Ch

Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13

Parameter # 82

SSI # 52h

Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the

host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and

a valid EAN-13 check digit.

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 51

13 - 52 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Febraban

Parameter # 1750

SSI # F8h 06h D6h

Febraban is an I 2 of 5 bar code of length 44 that requires special check characters to be inserted in the transmitted

data stream. When enabled, the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission is disabled. When

disabled, all I 2 of 5 functionality works as usual.

Recommendations for Length Setting

I 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).

I 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).

Enable Febraban

(1)

*Disable Febraban

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 52

Symbologies 13 - 53

I 2 of 5 Security Level

Parameter # 1121

SSI # F8h 04h 61h

I 2 of 5 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length. The

scanner offers four levels of decode security for I 2 of 5 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between

security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so

select only the level of security necessary.

• I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient

security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.

• I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A bar code must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety

requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.

• I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1 fails

to eliminate misdecodes.

• I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security

level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A bar code must be successfully read three times before

being decoded.

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes,

and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to

improve the quality of the bar codes.

I 2 of 5 Security Level 0

(0)

*I 2 of 5 Security Level 1

(1)

I 2 of 5 Security Level 2

(2)

I 2 of 5 Security Level 3

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 53

13 - 54 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1210

SSI # F8h 04h BAh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the

margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 13-78.

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5)

Parameter # 5

SSI # 05h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable D 2 of 5.

Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)

*Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)

Enable D 2 of 5

(1)

*Disable D 2 of 5

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 54

Symbologies 13 - 55

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5

L1 = Parameter # 20

SSI # 14h

L2 = Parameter # 21

SSI # 15h

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 1 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14

characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of

the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent

this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5

applications.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 55

13 - 56 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)

D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

*D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

(Default: 1 - 55)

D 2 of 5 - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 56

Symbologies 13 - 57

Codabar (NW - 7)

Parameter # 7

SSI # 07h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Codabar.

Set Lengths for Codabar

L1 = Parameter # 24

SSI # 18h

L2 = Parameter # 25

SSI # 19h

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is

from 4 - 55.

*Enable Codabar

(1)

Disable Codabar

(0)

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 57

13 - 58 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14

characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols

containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To

correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing

between 4 and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct

an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

Codabar - One Discrete Length

Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths

*Codabar - Length Within Range

(Default: 4 - 55)

Codabar - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 58

Symbologies 13 - 59

CLSI Editing

Parameter # 54

SSI # 36h

Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth

characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.

NOTIS Editing

Parameter # 55

SSI # 37h

Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host

system requires this data format.

NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.

Enable CLSI Editing

(1)

*Disable CLSI Editing

(0)

Enable NOTIS Editing

(1)

*Disable NOTIS Editing

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 59

13 - 60 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters

Parameter # 855

SSI # F2h 57h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop

characters.

Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 1784

SSI # F8h 06h F8h

Enable this feature to check the Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit to verify that the data complies with the specified

check digit algorithm.

Lower Case

(1)

*Upper Case

(0)

Enable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit

(1)

*Disable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 60

Symbologies 13 - 61

Transmit Codabar Check Digit

Parameter # 704

SSI # F1h C0h

Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Codabar check digit(s).

MSI

Parameter # 11

SSI # 0Bh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MSI.

NOTE Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Codabar Check Digit Transmission

(1)

*Disable Codabar Check Digit Transmission

(0)

Enable MSI

(1)

*Disable MSI

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 61

13 - 62 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for MSI

L1 = Parameter # 30

SSI # 1Eh

L2 = Parameter # 31

SSI # 1Fh

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 4 -

55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the

bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters,

scan MSI - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing

either 2 or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an

error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar

codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4

and 12 characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or

change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the

code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this,

select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 62

Symbologies 13 - 63

Set Lengths for MSI (continued)

MSI - One Discrete Length

MSI - Two Discrete Lengths

*MSI - Length Within Range

(Default: 4 - 55)

MSI - Any Length

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 63

13 - 64 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

MSI Check Digits

Parameter # 50

SSI # 32h

With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is

optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification

of the second check digit.

See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 13-65 to select second digit algorithms.

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)

Parameter # 46

SSI # 2Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.

*One MSI Check Digit

(0)

Two MSI Check Digits

(1)

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 64

Symbologies 13 - 65

MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Parameter # 51

SSI # 33h

Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following bar codes to select

the algorithm used to encode the check digit.

MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1392

SSI # F8h 05h 70h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding MSI bar codes with reduced quiet zones. If you

select Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 13-78.

MOD 11/MOD 10

(0)

*MOD 10/MOD 10

(1)

NOTE MSI does not support 1D Quiet Zone Level 3.

*Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)

Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 65

13 - 66 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Chinese 2 of 5

Parameter # 408

SSI # F0h 98h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.

Matrix 2 of 5

Parameter # 618

SSI # F1h 6Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.

Enable Chinese 2 of 5

(1)

*Disable Chinese 2 of 5

(0)

Enable Matrix 2 of 5

(1)

*Disable Matrix 2 of 5

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 66

Symbologies 13 - 67

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5

L1 = Parameter # 619

SSI # F1h 6Bh

L2 = Parameter # 620

SSI # F1h 6Ch

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)

the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a

specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length

range is from 4 - 55.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length

using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols

with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or

change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select

lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5

symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan

0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using

the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols

containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1,

2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.

• Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s

capability.

NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of

symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the

DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.

NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 67

13 - 68 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 622

SSI # F1h 6Eh

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following

bar codes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the bar code data.

Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

*Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

(Default 4 - 55)

Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length

Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 68

Symbologies 13 - 69

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 623

SSI # F1h 6Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Korean 3 of 5

Parameter # 581

SSI # F1h 45h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5.

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)

NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.

Enable Korean 3 of 5

(1)

*Disable Korean 3 of 5

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 69

13 - 70 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Inverse 1D

Parameter # 586

SSI # F1h 4Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting:

• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes.

NOTE This parameter does not apply to GS1 DataBar code types.

*Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

Inverse Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 70

Symbologies 13 - 71

GS1 DataBar

The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded

versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,

GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional

Parameter # 338

SSI # F0h 52h

GS1 DataBar Limited

Parameter # 339

SSI # F0h 53h

*Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(0)

*Enable GS1 DataBar Limited

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Limited

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 71

13 - 72 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

Parameter # 340

SSI # F0h 54h

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

Parameter # 397

SSI # F0h, 8Dh

This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as

part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from

DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as

EAN-13.

For bar codes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as

UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted

bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.

*Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(0)

Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

(1)

*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 72

Symbologies 13 - 73

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check

Parameter #

728

SSI #

F1h D8h

The decoder offers four levels of margin check for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes. There is an inverse relationship

between level of margin check and decoder aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check may result in

reduced aggressiveness in scanning, so only choose the level of margin check necessary.

• Level 1: No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet might result in erroneous

decoding of the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with the digits 9 and

• Level 2: Automatic risk detection. This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited

bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the decoder operates in Level 3 or

Level 1.

• Level 3: Margin check level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5x trailing clear margin.

• Level 4: Margin check level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of security requires a

5x leading and trailing clear margin.

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1

(1)

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 2

(2)

*GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3

(3)

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 4

(4)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 73

13 - 74 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

GS1 DataBar Security Level

Parameter # 1706

SSI # F8h 06h AAh

The decoder offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar

Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) bar codes.

• Security Level 0: This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while

providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.

• Security Level 1: This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness

(default).

• Security Level 2: This setting allows greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to

eliminate misdecodes.

• Security Level 3: This setting applies the highest safety requirements. Select if Security Level 2 was applied

and misdecodes still occur.

Security Level 0

(0)

* Security Level 1

(1)

Security Level 2

(2)

Security Level 3

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 74

Symbologies 13 - 75

Symbology-Specific Security Features

Redundancy Level

Parameter # 78

SSI # 4Eh

The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar

code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality:

• Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding:

• Codabar (8 characters or less)

• MSI (4 characters or less)

• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)

• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)

•

Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding.

•

Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding, but

must read the following codes three times:

• Codabar (8 characters or less)

• MSI (4 characters or less)

• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)

• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)

•

Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 75

13 - 76 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Redundancy Level (continued)

*Redundancy Level 1

(1)

Redundancy Level 2

(2)

Redundancy Level 3

(3)

Redundancy Level 4

(4)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 76

Symbologies 13 - 77

Security Level

Parameter # 77

SSI # 4Dh

The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family,

UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is

an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security

necessary for the application.

• Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security

decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.

• Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.

• Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.

• Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes,

and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to

improve the quality of the bar codes.

Security Level 0

(0)

*Security Level 1

(1)

Security Level 2

(2)

Security Level 3

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 77

13 - 78 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

1D Quiet Zone Level

Parameter # 1288

SSI # F8h 05h 08h

This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding bar codes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on

either side of a bar code), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because

higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the

symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other

symbologies. Options are:

• 1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone.

• 1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone.

• 1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of bar code for decoding.

• 1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of bar code.

1D Quiet Zone Level 0

(0)

*1D Quiet Zone Level 1

(1)

1D Quiet Zone Level 2

(2)

1D Quiet Zone Level 3

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 78

Symbologies 13 - 79

Intercharacter Gap Size

Parameter # 381

SSI # F0h, 7Dh

The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar

code printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner from

decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these

out-of-specification bar codes.

Composite

Composite CC-C

Parameter # 341

SSI # F0h 55h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.

*Normal Intercharacter Gaps

(6)

Large Intercharacter Gaps

(10)

Enable CC-C

(1)

*Disable CC-C

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 79

13 - 80 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Composite CC-A/B

Parameter # 342

SSI # F0h 56h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.

Composite TLC-39

Parameter # 371

SSI # F0h 73h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.

Enable CC-A/B

(1)

*Disable CC-A/B

(0)

Enable TLC39

(1)

*Disable TLC39

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 80

Symbologies 13 - 81

Composite Inverse

Parameter # 1113

SSI # F8h 04h 59h

This parameter sets Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode. This mode only supports Inverse

Composite that has DataBar combined with CCAB. No other 1D/2D combinations.

• Regular Only: The digital scanner decodes regular Composite bar codes only. (default).

• Inverse Only: The digital scanner decodes inverse Composite bar codes only. For this parameter to work as

expected, Composite CC-A/B on page 13-80 and corresponding 1D Inverse or 1D Inverse Autodetect (page

13-70) must be enabled.

NOTE To decode regular Composite, Composite Inverse must be set to Regular Only and Inverse 1D must be

set to Regular Only or Autodetect.

To decode inverse Composite, Composite Inverse must be set to Inverse Only and Inverse 1D must be

set to Inverse Only or Autodetect.

* Regular Only

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 81

13 - 82 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC Composite Mode

Parameter # 344

SSI # F0h 58h

Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:

• UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.

• UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the

bar code.

• Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the

UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.

*UPC Never Linked

(0)

UPC Always Linked

(1)

Autodiscriminate UPC Composites

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 82

Symbologies 13 - 83

Composite Beep Mode

Parameter # 398

SSI # F0h, 8Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite

bar code.

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes

Parameter # 427

SSI # F0h, ABh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable this mode.

Single Beep After Both are Decoded

(0)

*Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded

(1)

Double Beep After Both are Decoded

(2)

Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes

(1)

*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 83

13 - 84 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

2D Symbologies

PDF417

Parameter # 15

SSI # 0Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable PDF417.

MicroPDF417

Parameter # 227

SSI # E3h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.

*Enable PDF417

(1)

Disable PDF417

(0)

Enable MicroPDF417

(1)

*Disable MicroPDF417

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 84

Symbologies 13 - 85

Code 128 Emulation

Parameter # 123

SSI # 7Bh

Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable AIM

Code Identifiers on page E-3 for this parameter to work.

Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:

]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905

]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:

]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905

]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909

]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.

NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites

instead.

Enable Code 128 Emulation

(1)

*Disable Code 128 Emulation

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 85

13 - 86 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Data Matrix

Parameter # 292

SSI # F0h, 24h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Data Matrix.

GS1 Data Matrix

Parameter # 1336

SSI # F8h 05h 38h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.

*Enable Data Matrix

(1)

Disable Data Matrix

(0)

Enable GS1 Data Matrix

(1)

*Disable GS1 Data Matrix

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 86

Symbologies 13 - 87

Data Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 588

SSI # F1h 4Ch

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting:

•

Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.

Regular Only

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

*Inverse Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 87

13 - 88 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images

Parameter # 537

SSI # F1h 19h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes:

• Never - Do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images.

• Always - Decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images.

• Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.

Never

(0)

Always

(1)

*Auto

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 88

Symbologies 13 - 89

Maxicode

Parameter # 294

SSI # F0h, 26h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Maxicode.

QR Code

Parameter # 293

SSI # F0h, 25h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable QR Code.

Enable Maxicode

(1)

*Disable Maxicode

(0)

*Enable QR Code

(1)

Disable QR Code

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 89

13 - 90 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

GS1 QR

Parameter # 1343

SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1 QR.

MicroQR

Parameter # 573

SSI # F1h 3Dh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MicroQR.

Enable GS1 QR

(1)

*Disable GS1 QR

(0)

*Enable MicroQR

(1)

Disable MicroQR

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 90

Symbologies 13 - 91

Weblink QR

Parameter #1947

SSI # F8 07 9Bh

Scan Decode Weblink QR Codes to decode Weblink QR bar codes.

Do Not Decode Weblink QR Codes

(0)

*Decode Weblink QR Codes

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 91

13 - 92 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Linked QR

Parameter #

1847

SSI # 737h

Scan one of the following barcodes to select a linked QR mode:

• Linked QR Only - The scanner does not decode individual QR symbols from a set of Linked QR codes.

• Individual QR With Headers - The scanner decodes individual QR symbols from a set of Linked QR codes

and retains the header information and data.

• Individual QR No Headers - The scanner decodes individual QR symbols from a set of Linked QR codes

and transmits the data without header information.

*Linked QR Only

(0)

Individual QR With Headers

(1)

Individual QR No Headers

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 92

Symbologies 13 - 93

Aztec

Parameter # 574

SSI # F1h 3Eh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Aztec.

Aztec Inverse

Parameter # 589

SSI # F1h 4Dh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting:

• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.

NOTE Enabling this also enables Linked Aztec.

*Enable Aztec

(1)

Disable Aztec

(0)

Regular Only

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

*Inverse Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 93

13 - 94 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Han Xin

Parameter # 1167

SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Han Xin.

Han Xin Inverse

Parameter # 1168

SSI # F8h 04h 90h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting:

• Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin bar codes with normal reflectance only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin bar codes with inverse reflectance only.

• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin bar codes.

Enable Han Xin

(1)

*Disable Han Xin

(0)

*Regular Only

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

Inverse Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 94

Symbologies 13 - 95

Grid Matrix

Parameter # 1718

SSI # F8h 06h B6h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Grid Matrix.

Grid Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 1719

SSI # F8h 06h B7h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting:

• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Grid Matrix bar codes only.

• Autodiscriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix bar codes.

Enable

(1)

*Disable

(0)

*Regular Only

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

Autodiscriminate

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 95

13 - 96 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Grid Matrix Mirror

Parameter # 1736

SSI # F8h 06h C8h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Grid Matrix mirror decoder setting:

• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix bar codes only.

• Mirrored Only - The scanner decodes mirrored Grid Matrix bar codes only.

• Auto-discriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and mirrored Grid Matrix bar codes.

*Regular Only

(0)

Mirrored Only

(1)

Autodiscriminate

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 96

Symbologies 13 - 97

DotCode

Parameter # 1906

SSI # F8 07 72h

Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable DotCode.

*Disable DotCode

(0)

Enable DotCode

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 97

13 - 98 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

DotCode Inverse

Parameter # 1907

SSI # F8 07 73h

Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Inverse decoder setting. Setting options are:

• Regular Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with normal reflectance only.

• Inverse Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with inverse reflectance only.

• Inverse Autodetect - Decoder decodes both regular and inverse DotCode barcodes.

Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

*Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 98

Symbologies 13 - 99

DotCode Mirrored

Parameter # 1908

SSI # F8 07 74h

Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Mirror decoder setting:

• Non-Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes non-mirrored DotCode barcodes only.

• Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes mirrored DotCode barcodes only.

• Autodetect - Digital scanner decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored DotCode barcodes.

Never

(0)

Always

(1)

*Autodetect

(2)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 99

13 - 100 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

DotCode Prioritize

Parameter # 1937

SSI # F8 07 91h

Enable DotCode Prioritize to give priority to DotCode decoding as compared to other symbologies.

DotCode Erasure Limit

Parameter # 2063

SSI # F8 08 0F

This parameter sets the maximum number of erasures in DotCode codewords before passing the codewords for

error correction. The value range is from 4 to 20. The default value is 10.

A bigger value means that DotCode barcodes are easier to decode, but the chance of getting a misdecode is

higher.

To set a DotCode Erasure Limit value, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Bar

Codes on page G-1 that correspond to the desired value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For

example, to set an erasure value of 4, scan this barcode, and then scan the 0 and 4 barcodes. To correct an error

or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3

Disable

(0)

*Enable

(1)

DotCode Erasure Limit

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 100

Symbologies 13 - 101

Escape Characters

Parameter # 233

SSI # E9h

This enables the backslash (\) character as an Escape character for systems that can process transmissions

containing special data sequences. Scan one of the following bar codes to either format special data according to

the GLI (Global Label Identifier) protocol, or to disable this parameter. This parameter only affects the data portion

of a Macro PDF symbol transmission; the Macro PDF Control Header (if enabled) is always sent with GLI

formatting.

Flush Macro PDF Buffer

Scan the following bar code to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the

host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.

Abort Macro PDF Entry

Scan the following bar code to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and

abort from Macro PDF mode.

GLI Protocol

(2)

*None

(0)

Flush Macro PDF Buffer

Abort Macro PDF Entry

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 101

13 - 102 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Postal Codes

US Postnet

Parameter # 89

SSI # 59h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable US Postnet.

US Planet

Parameter # 90

SSI # 5Ah

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable US Planet.

Enable US Postnet

(1)

*Disable US Postnet

(0)

Enable US Planet

(1)

*Disable US Planet

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 102

Symbologies 13 - 103

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 95

SSI # 5Fh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet

and US Planet, with or without the check digit.

UK Postal

Parameter # 91

SSI # 5Bh

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UK Postal.

*Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(0)

Enable UK Postal

(1)

*Disable UK Postal

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 103

13 - 104 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 96

SSI # 60h

Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.

Japan Postal

Parameter # 290

SSI # F0h, 22h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Japan Postal.

*Transmit UK Postal

Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

(0)

Enable Japan Postal

(1)

*Disable Japan Postal

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 104

Symbologies 13 - 105

Australia Post

Parameter # 291

SSI # F0h, 23h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Australia Post.

Enable Australia Post

(1)

*Disable Australia Post

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 105

13 - 106 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Australia Post Format

Parameter # 718

SSI # F1h, CEh

Scan one of the following bar codes to select a format for Australia Post:

•

Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding

Tables.

• Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.

•

Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.

• Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.

For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical

Specifications available at www.auspost.com.au.

NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the

Encoding Table used for encoding.

*Autodiscriminate

(0)

Raw Format

(1)

Alphanumeric Encoding

(2)

Numeric Encoding

(3)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 106

Symbologies 13 - 107

Netherlands KIX Code

Parameter # 326

SSI # F0h, 46h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

Parameter # 592

SSI # F1h 50h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.

Enable Netherlands KIX Code

(1)

*Disable Netherlands KIX Code

(0)

Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(1)

*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(0)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 107

13 - 108 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPU FICS Postal

Parameter # 611

SSI # F1h 63h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.

Mailmark

Parameter # 1337

SSI # F8h 05h 39h

Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Mailmark.

Enable UPU FICS Postal

(1)

*Disable UPU FICS Postal

(0)

*Disable Mailmark

(0)

Enable Mailmark

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 108

CHAPTER 14 DATA FORMATTING:

ADF

Introduction

This chapter briefly describes the Zebra features available for customizing scanner operation.

Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)

Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data from before transmission to the host device. Use

ADF to edit scan data to suit your host's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is

programmed using 123Scan.

To watch a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:

http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos

For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

14 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

APPENDIX A STANDARD DEFAULT

PARAMETERS

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

HID Device Conversion N/A N/A Scanner as CDC Device

1-6

Shutting Off the Digital Scanner

Battery

N/A N/A N/A

1-7

Report Software Version Bar Code N/A N/A N/A

4-7

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter N/A N/A N/A

5-5

Parameter Bar Code Scanning 236 ECh Enable

5-6

Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable

5-6

Beeper Volume 140 8Ch High

5-7

Beeper Tone 145 91h Medium

5-8

Beeper Duration 628 F1h 74h Medium

5-9

Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do Not Suppress

5-9

LED on Good Decode 744 F1h E8h Enable

5-10

Direct Decode Indicator 859 F2h 5Bh Disable

5-10

Low Power Mode 128 80h Enable

5-11

Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 100 msec

5-12

Timeout to Low Power Mode from

Auto Aim

729 F1h D9h 15 sec

5-14

Battery Preservation Mode 1765 F8h 06h E5h Enable

5-15

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

A - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Trigger Mode (or Hand-Held Trigger

Mode)

138 8Ah Standard (Level)

5-16

Hands-Free Mode 630 F1h 76h Enable

5-17

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable

5-18

Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode

Aiming Pattern

590 F1h 4Eh Enable Hands-Free

(Presentation) Decode Aiming

Pattern on PDF

5-19

Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Disable Picklist Mode Always

5-20

Continuous Bar Code Read 649 F1h 89h Disable

5-21

Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable

5-21

Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Seconds

5-22

Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout 400 F0 90 15

5-22

Timeout Between Decodes, Same

Symbol

137 89h 0.5 Seconds

5-23

Timeout Between Decodes, Different

Symbols

144 90h 0.1 Seconds

5-23

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix

Only)

537 F1h 19h Auto 5-24

Mobile Phone/Display Mode N/A N/A N/A

5-24

PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable

5-25

PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 200 ms

5-25

Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable

5-26

Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh High

5-26

Low Light Scene Detection 810 F2h 2Ah Dim Illumination Low Light

Assist Scene Detection

5-27

Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger

Mode Only)

858 F2h 5Ah Less

5-28

Product ID (PID) Type 1281 F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique

5-29

Product ID (PID) Value 1725 F8h 06h BDh 0

5-29

ECLevel 1710 F8h 06h AEh 0

5-30

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Standard Default Parameters A - 3

Miscellaneous Options

Enter Key N/A N/A N/A

5-31

Tab Key N/A N/A N/A

5-31

Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None

5-32

Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF>

5-33

Suffix 1 Value

Suffix 2 Value

98, 104

100, 106

62h, 68h

64h, 6Ah

7013 <CR><LF>

5-33

Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data As Is

5-34

FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh 7013 <CR><LF>

5-36

Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5E Disable

5-37

Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 F8h 04h 5Eh Disable

5-38

Send Versions

Software Version N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Serial Number N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Manufacturing Information N/A N/A N/A

5-39

Radio Communications

Radio Communications Host Types N/A N/A Cradle Bluetooth Classic

(Cradle Host)

6-5

Bluetooth Friendly Name 607 F1h 5Fh N/A

6-10

Discoverable Mode 610 F1h 62h General

6-11

Wi-Fi Friendly Mode 1299 F8h 05h 77h Disable

6-12

Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion N/A N/A Use All Channels

6-12

Radio Output Power 1324 F8h 05h 2Ch Medium Power Setting

6-14

Link Supervision Timeout 1698 F8h 06h A2h 5 sec

6-15

Bluetooth Radio State 1354 F8h 05h 4Ah On

6-16

Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle 1114 F8h 04h 5Ah Disable

6-16

HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay (0 msec)

6-18

HID CAPS Lock Override N/A N/A Disable

6-18

HID Ignore Unknown Characters N/A N/A Enable

6-19

Emulate Keypad N/A N/A Enable

6-19

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

A - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Fast HID Keyboard 1361 F8h 05h 51h Enable

6-20

Quick Keypad Emulation 1362 F8h 05h 52h Enable

6-20

HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable

6-21

HID Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable

6-21

Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable

6-22

Convert Case N/A N/A No Case Conversion

6-22

Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback 559 F1h 2Fh Disable

6-23

Reconnect Attempt Interval 558 F1h 2Eh 30 sec

6-24

Auto-Reconnect 604 F1h 5Ch Auto-Reconnect Immediately

6-25

Beep on Insertion 288 20h Enable

6-26

Beep on <BEL> 150 96 Enable

6-26

Pairing Modes 542 F1h 1Eh Unlocked

6-27

Pairing on Contacts 545 F1h 21h Enable

6-28

Toggle Pairing 1322 F8h 05h 2Ah Disable

6-29

Connection Maintenance Interval N/A N/A 15 Minutes

6-29

Batch Mode 544 F1h 20h Normal (Do Not Batch Data)

6-32

Persistent Batch Storage 1399 F8h 05h 77h Disable

6-34

PIN Code (Set and Store) 552 F1h 28h 12345

6-35

Variable Pin Code 608 F1h 60h Static

(Default PIN code is 12345)

6-36

Bluetooth Security Levels 1393 F8h 05h 71h Low

6-37

Save Bluetooth Connection

Information

1743 F8h 06h CFh Enable

6-40

Signature Capture Preferences

Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable

7-3

Signature Capture File Format

Selector

313 F0h 39h JPEG

7-4

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel

(BPP)

314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP

7-5

Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400

7-6

Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100

7-6

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Standard Default Parameters A - 5

Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65

7-6

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type N/A N/A USB Keyboard HID 8-5

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status

Handshaking

N/A N/A Enable 8-7

Native Firmware Update N/A N/A Disable 8-7

USB Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay 8-8

USB CAPS Lock Override N/A N/A Disable 8-8

Bar Codes With Unknown

Characters

N/A N/A Enable 8-9

USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A N/A Disable 8-9

USB Fast HID N/A N/A Enable 8-10

USB Polling Interval N/A N/A 3 msec 8-11

Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Enable 8-13

Quick Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Enable 8-13

Keypad Emulation with Leading

Zero

N/A N/A Enable 8-14

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable 8-14

Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable 8-15

Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable 8-15

Convert Case N/A N/A None 8-16

USB Static CDC N/A N/A Enable 8-16

CDC Beep on <BEL> N/A N/A Enable 8-17

USB CDC Host Variant 1713 N/A CDC Standard 8-17

TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep N/A N/A Honor 8-19

TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive N/A N/A Ignore 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code

Configuration Directive

N/A N/A Ignore 8-20

TGCS (IBM) USB Specification

Version

N/A N/A Version 2.2 8-21

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

A - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A

9-12

Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600

9-12

Parity 158 9Eh None

9-14

Check Parity 151 97h Disable

9-15

Stop Bits 157 9Dh 1

9-15

Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK

9-16

Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low

9-17

Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode Data

9-17

Host Serial Response Timeout 155 9Bh 2 Seconds

9-18

Host Character Timeout 239 EFh 200 msec

9-19

Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Option 1

9-20

Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh 0 msec

9-21

Event Reporting

Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable

9-22

Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable

9-23

Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable

9-23

RS-232 Host Parameters

RS-232 Host Types

N/A N/A

Standard

10-6

Baud Rate

N/A N/A

9600

10-8

Parity

N/A N/A

None

10-9

Stop Bits

N/A N/A

1 Stop Bit

10-9

Data Bits

N/A N/A

8-bit

10-10

Check Receive Errors

N/A N/A

Enable

10-10

Hardware Handshaking

N/A N/A

None

10-11

Software Handshaking

N/A N/A

None

10-13

Host Serial Response Timeout

N/A N/A

2 Sec

10-15

RTS Line State

N/A N/A

Low RTS

10-16

Beep on <BEL>

N/A N/A

Disable

10-16

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Standard Default Parameters A - 7

Intercharacter Delay

N/A N/A

0 msec

10-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

N/A N/A

Normal Operation

10-18

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

N/A N/A

Send Bar Code With

Unknown Characters

10-18

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters

Port Address

N/A N/A

None

11-4

Convert Unknown to Code 39

N/A N/A Disable 11-5

RS-485 Beep Directive

N/A N/A

Ignore

11-5

RS-485 Bar Code Configuration

Directive

N/A N/A

Ignore

11-6

IBM-485 Specification Version

N/A N/A

Original Specification

11-6

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Type

N/A N/A

IBM AT Notebook

12-4

Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

N/A N/A

Send Bar Codes with

Unknown Characters

12-4

Keystroke Delay

N/A N/A

No Delay

12-5

Intra-keystroke Delay

N/A N/A

Disable

12-5

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation

N/A N/A

Enable

12-6

Quick Keypad Emulation

N/A N/A

Enable

12-6

Simulated Caps Lock

N/A N/A

Disable

12-7

Caps Lock Override

N/A N/A

Disable

12-7

Convert Case

N/A N/A

Do Not Convert

12-8

Function Key Mapping

N/A N/A

Disable

12-8

FN1 Substitution

N/A N/A

Disable

12-9

Send Make and Break

N/A N/A

Send

12-9

Symbologies

Enable/Disable All Code Types

13-8

1D Symbologies

UPC/EAN/JAN

UPC-A 1 01h Enable 13-9

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

A - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC-E 2 02h Enable 13-9

UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 13-10

EAN-8/JAN 8 4 04h Enable 13-10

EAN-13/JAN 13 3 03h Enable 13-11

Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 13-11

Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 13-12

ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 13-12

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN

Supplementals

(2 and 5 digits)

16 10h Ignore 13-13

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1:

Supplemental 2:

579

580

F1h 43h

F1h 44h

000 13-16

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental

Redundancy

80 50h 10 13-16

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN

Supplemental AIM ID Format

672 F1h A0h Combined 13-17

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 13-18

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 13-18

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 13-19

Transmit Ean-8 Check Digit 1881 F8 07 59h Enable 13-19

Transmit Ean-13 Check Digit 1882 F8 07 5Ah Enable 13-20

UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 13-21

UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 13-22

UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 13-23

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A 37 25h Disable 13-24

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A 38 26h Disable 13-24

EAN/JAN Zero Extend 39 27h Disable 13-25

UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 13-25

Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon Format 13-26

UPC Reduced Quiet Zone 1289 F8h 05h 09h Disable 13-26

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Standard Default Parameters A - 9

Code 128

Code 128 8 08h Enable 13-27

Set Lengths for Code 128 209, 210 D1h, D2h 1 - 55 13-27

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 13-28

ISBT 128 84 54h Disable 13-29

ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 13-30

Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 13-31

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 13-31

Code 128 <FNC4> 1254 F8h 04h E6h Honor 13-32

Code 128 Security Level 751 F1h EFh Security Level 1 13-32

Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone 1208 F8h 04h B8h Disable 13-33

Code 39

Code 39 0 00h Enable 13-34

Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 13-34

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(Italian Pharmacy Code)

86 56h Disable 13-35

Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 13-35

Set Lengths for Code 39 18, 19 12h, 13h 1 - 55 13-36

Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 30h Disable 13-37

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 13-38

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 13-38

Code 39 Security Level 750 F1h EEh Security Level 1 13-39

Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone 1209 F8h 04h B9h Disable 13-41

Code 93

Code 93 9 09h Enable 13-41

Set Lengths for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah, 1Bh 1 - 55 13-42

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

A - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 11

Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 13-44

Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 13-44

Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 34h Disable 13-46

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 13-47

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 6 06h Enable 13-47

Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 22, 23 16h, 17h 6 to 55 13-48

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 13-50

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 13-51

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 82 52h Disable 13-51

Febraban 1750 F8h 06h D6h Disable 13-52

I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1 13-53

I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone 1210 F8h 04h

BAh

Disable 13-54

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 13-54

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 1 to 55 13-55

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar 7 07h Enable 13-57

Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h, 19h 4 to 55 13-57

CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 13-59

NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 13-59

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/

Stop Characters Detection

855 F2h 57h Upper Case 13-60

Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit 1784 F8h 06h F8h Disable 13-60

Transmit Codabar Check Digit 704 F1h C0h Disable 13-61

MSI

MSI 11 0Bh Disable 13-61

Set Lengths for MSI 30, 31 1Eh, 1Fh 4 to 55 13-62

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Standard Default Parameters A - 11

MSI Check Digits 50 32h One 13-64

Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 13-64

MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-65

MSI Reduced Quiet Zone 1392 F8h 05h 70h Disable

13-65

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 13-66

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 13-66

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5

Lengths

619

620

F1h 6Bh

F1h 6Ch

4 to 55 13-67

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 13-68

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 13-69

Korean 3 of 5

Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 13-69

Inverse 1D

586 F1h 4Ah Regular 13-70

GS1 DataBar

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1

DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar

Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked

Omnidirectional

338 F0h 52h Enable 13-71

GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 13-71

GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1

DataBar Expanded Stacked

340 F0h 54h Enable 13-72

Convert GS1 DataBar to

UPC/EAN/JAN

397 F0h 8Dh Disable 13-72

GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728 F1h D8h

Level 3 13-73

GS1 DataBar Security Level 1706 F8h 06h AAh

Level 1 13-74

Symbology-Specific Security Features

Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 13-75

Security Level 77 4Dh 1 13-77

1D Quiet Zone Level 1288 F8h 05h 08h 1 13-78

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

A - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 13-79

Composite Codes

Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 13-79

Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 13-80

Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 13-80

Composite Inverse 1113 F8h 04h 59h Regular Only

13-81

UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h UPC Never Linked 13-82

Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code Type is

Decoded

13-83

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes

427 F0h ABh Disable 13-83

2D Symbologies

PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 13-84

MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 13-84

Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 13-85

Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 13-86

GS1 Data Matrix 1336 F8h 05h 38h Disable 13-86

Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch Inverse Autodetect 13-87

Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537 F1h 19h Auto 13-88

Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 13-89

QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 13-89

GS1 QR 1343 F8h 05h 3Fh Disable 13-90

MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 13-90

Weblink QR 1947 F8 07 9Bh Enable 13-91

Linked QR 1847 737h Linked QR Only 13-92

Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 13-93

Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 13-93

Han Xin 1167 F8h 04h 8Fh Disable 13-94

Han Xin Inverse 1168 F8h 04h 90h Regular 13-94

Grid Matrix 1718 F8 06 B6 Disable 13-95

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Standard Default Parameters A - 13

Grid Matrix Inverse 1719 F8 06 B7 Regular Only 13-95

Grid Matrix Mirror 1736 F8 06 C8 Regular Only 13-96

DotCode 1906 F8 07 72h Disable 13-97

DotCode Inverse 1907 F8 07 73h Autodetect 13-98

DotCode Mirrored 1908 F8 07 74h Autodetect 13-99

DotCode Prioritize 1937 F8 07 91h Enable 13-100

DotCode Erasure Limit 2063 F8 08 0F 10 13-100

Postal Codes

US Postnet 89 59h Disable 13-102

US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 13-102

Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 13-103

UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 13-103

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 13-104

Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 13-104

Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 13-105

Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 13-106

Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 13-107

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent

Mail

592 F1h 50h Disable 13-107

UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 13-108

Mailmark 1337 F8h 05h 39h Disable 13-108

Country Codes

USB and Keyboard Wedge Country

Keyboard Types

N/A N/A US English (North American)

B-2

CJK Decode Control

CJK Control Parameters N/A N/A Universal Output

D-1

Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Number

SSI Number Default

Page

Number

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

A - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

APPENDIX B COUNTRY CODES

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or keyboard wedge host.

The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see Chapter 8, USB Interface and Chapter 12, Keyboard

Wedge Interface.

To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Appendix B, Country Codes.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (

*).

*US English (North American)

Feature/Option

*Indicates Default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

B - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)

Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB

Keyboard (HID) device. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Keypad Emulation on page 8-13 for the USB HID

host. For a keyboard wedge host, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 12-6.

NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the

standard startup beep sequences.

NOTE For best results when using international keyboards, enable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 8-13.

IMPORTANT 1. Some country keyboard bar code types are specific to certain Windows Operating Systems

(i.e., XP, and Win 7 or higher). Bar codes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted so in

their bar code captions.

2. Use the French International bar code for Belgian French keyboards.

*US English (North American)

US English (Mac)

Albanian

Arabic (101)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Country Codes B - 3

Country Codes (Continued)

Arabic (102)

Arabic (102) AZERTY

Azeri (Latin)

Azeri (Cyrillic)

Belarusian

Bosnian (Latin)

Bosnian (Cyrillic)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

B - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Bulgarian (Latin)

Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter)

(Bulgarian -Windows XP

Typewriter - Win 7 or higher)

Canadian French Win7

Canadian French (Legacy)

Canadian Multilingual Standard

Chinese (ASCII)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Country Codes B - 5

Country Codes (Continued)

Chinese (Simplified)*

Chinese (Traditional)*

Croatian

*For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode

Control.

Czech

Czech (Programmer)

Czech (QWERTY)

Danish

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

B - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Dutch (Netherlands)

Estonian

Faeroese

Finnish

French (France)

French International

(Belgian French)

French (Canada) 95/98

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Country Codes B - 7

Country Codes (Continued)

French (Canada) 2000/XP*

*Note that there is also a country code bar code for

Canadian Multilingual Standard on page B-4. Be sure to

select the appropriate bar code for your host system.

Galician

German

Greek Latin

Greek (220) Latin

Greek (319) Latin

Greek

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

B - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Greek (220)

Greek (319)

Greek Polytonic

Hebrew Israel

Hungarian

Hungarian_101KEY

Icelandic

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Country Codes B - 9

Country Codes (Continued)

Irish

Italian

Italian (142)

Japanese (ASCII)

Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)*

*For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode

Control.

Kazakh

Korean (ASCII)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

B - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Korean (Hangul)*

*For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode Control.

Kyrgyz

Latin American

Latvian

Latvian (QWERTY)

Lithuanian

Lithuanian (IBM)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Country Codes B - 11

Country Codes (Continued)

Macedonian (FYROM)

Maltese_47KEY

Mongolian

Norwegian

Polish (214)

Polish (Programmer)

Portuguese (Brazil)

(Windows XP)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

B - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)

Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)

Portuguese (Portugal)

Romanian

(Windows XP)

Romanian (Legacy)

(Win 7 or higher)

Romanian (Standard)

(Win 7 or higher)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Country Codes B - 13

Country Codes (Continued)

Romanian (Programmer)

(Win 7 or higher)

Russian

Russian (Typewriter)

Serbian (Latin)

Serbian (Cyrillic)

Slovak

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

B - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

Slovak (QWERTY)

Slovenian

Spanish

Spanish (Variation)

Swedish

Swiss French

Swiss German

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

Country Codes B - 15

Country Codes (Continued)

Tatar

Thai (Kedmanee)

Turkish F

Turkish Q

UK English

Ukrainian

US Dvorak

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

B - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Codes (Continued)

US Dvorak Left

US Dvorak Right

US International

Uzbek

Vietnamese

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

APPENDIX C COUNTRY CODE

PAGES

Introduction

This chapter provides bar codes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type selected in Appendix C,

Country Code Pages. If the default code page in Table C-1 is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type,

you do not need to scan a country code page bar code.

Country Code Page Defaults

Table C-1 lists the code page default for each country keyboard.

NOTE ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the

Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.

Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults

Country Keyboard Code Page Default

US English (North American) Windows 1252

US English (Mac) Mac CP10000

Albanian Windows 1250

Arabic 101 Windows 1256

Arabic 102 Windows 1256

Arabic 102 AZERTY Windows 1256

Azeri Latin Windows 1254

Azeri Cyrillic Windows 1251

Belarusian Windows 1251

Bosnian Latin Windows 1250

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

C - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Bosnian Cyrillic Windows 1251

Bulgarian Latin Windows 1250

Bulgarian Cyrillic Windows 1251

Canadian French Win7 Windows 1252

Canadian French (Legacy) Windows 1252

Canadian Multilingual Windows 1252

Croatian Windows 1250

Chinese ASCII Windows 1252

Chinese (Simplified) Windows 936, GBK

Chinese (Traditional) Windows 950, Big5

Czech Windows 1250

Czech Programmers Windows 1250

Czech QWERTY Windows 1250

Danish Windows 1252

Dutch Netherland Windows 1252

Estonian Windows 1257

Faeroese Windows 1252

Finnish Windows 1252

French (France) Windows 1252

French (Canada) 95/98 Windows 1252

French (Canada) 2000/XP Windows 1252

French International (Belgian French) Windows 1252

Galician Windows 1252

German Windows 1252

Greek Latin Windows 1252

Greek220 Latin Windows 1253

Greek319 Latin Windows 1252

Greek Windows 1253

Greek220 Windows 1253

Greek319 Windows 1253

Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)

Country Keyboard Code Page Default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Country Code Pages C - 3

Greek Polytonic Windows 1253

Hebrew Israel Windows 1255

Hungarian Windows 1250

Hungarian_101KEY Windows 1250

Icelandic Windows 1252

Irish Windows 1252

Italian Windows 1252

Italian_142 Windows 1252

Japanese ASCII Windows 1252

Japanese (Shift-JIS) Windows 932, Shift-JIS

Kazakh Windows 1251

Korean ASCII Windows 1252

Korean (Hangul) Windows 949, Hangul

Kyrgyz Cyrillic Windows 1251

Latin America Windows 1252

Latvian Windows 1257

Latvian QWERTY Windows 1257

Lithuanian Windows 1257

Lithuanian_IBM Windows 1257

Macedonian -FYROM Windows 1251

Maltese_47KEY Windows 1252

Mongolian-Cyrillic Windows 1251

Norwegian Windows 1252

Polish_214 Windows 1250

Polish Programmer Windows 1250

Portuguese Brazil Windows 1252

Portuguese Brazilian ABNT Windows 1252

Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2 Windows 1252

Portuguese Portugal Windows 1252

Romanian Windows 1250

Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)

Country Keyboard Code Page Default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

C - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Romanian Legacy Windows 1250

Romanian Standard Windows 1250

Romanian Programmer Windows 1250

Russian Windows 1251

Russian Typewriter Windows 1251

Serbian Latin Windows 1250

Serbian Cyrillic Windows 1251

Slovak Windows 1250

Slovak QWERTY Windows 1250

Slovenian Windows 1250

Spanish Windows 1252

Spanish Variation Windows 1252

Swedish Windows 1252

Swiss French Windows 1252

Swiss German Windows 1252

Tatar Windows 1251

Thai-Kedmanee Windows 874

Turkish F Windows 1254

Turkish Q Windows 1254

Ukrainian Windows 1251

United Kingdom Windows 1252

United States Windows 1252

US Dvorak Windows 1252

US Dvorak Left Hand Windows 1252

US Dvorak Right Hand Windows 1252

US International Windows 1252

Uzbek Cyrillic Windows 1251

Vietnamese Windows 1258

Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)

Country Keyboard Code Page Default

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Country Code Pages C - 5

Country Code Page Bar Codes

Scan the bar code corresponding to the country keyboard code page.

Windows 1250

Latin 2, Central European

Windows 1251

Cyrillic, Slavic

Windows 1252

Latin 1, Western European

Windows 1253

Greek

Windows 1254

Latin 5, Turkish

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

C - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Code Pages (Continued)

Windows 1255

Hebrew

Windows 1256

Arabic

Windows 1257

Baltic

Windows 1258

Vietnamese

Windows 874

Thai

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Country Code Pages C - 7

Country Code Pages (Continued)

Windows 20866

Cyrillic KOI8-R

Windows 932

Japanese Shift-JIS

Windows 936

Simplified Chinese GBK

Windows 54936

Simplified Chinese GB18030

Windows 949

Korean Hangul

Windows 950

Traditional Chinese Big5

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

C - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Code Pages (Continued)

MS-DOS 437

Latin US

MS-DOS 737

Greek

MS-DOS 775

Baltic

MS-DOS 850

Latin 1

MS-DOS 852

Latin 2

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Country Code Pages C - 9

Country Code Pages (Continued)

MS-DOS 855

Cyrillic

MS-DOS 857

Turkish

MS-DOS 860

Portuguese

MS-DOS 861

Icelandic

MS-DOS 862

Hebrew

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

C - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Code Pages (Continued)

MS-DOS 863

French Canada

MS-DOS 865

Nordic

MS-DOS 866

Cyrillic

MS-DOS 869

Greek 2

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Country Code Pages C - 11

Country Code Pages (Continued)

ISO 8859-1

Latin 1, Western European

ISO 8859-2

Latin 2, Central European

ISO 8859-3

Latin 3, South European

ISO 8859-4

Latin 4, North European

ISO 8859-5

Cyrillic

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

C - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Code Pages (Continued)

ISO 8859-6

Arabic

ISO 8859-7

Greek

ISO 8859-8

Hebrew

ISO 8859-9

Latin 5, Turkish

ISO 8859-10

Latin 6, Nordic

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Country Code Pages C - 13

Country Code Pages (Continued)

ISO 8859-11

Thai

ISO 8859-13

Latin 7, Baltic

ISO 8859-14

Latin 8, Celtic

ISO 8859-15

Latin 9

ISO 8859-16

Latin 10, South-Eastern European

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

C - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Country Code Pages (Continued)

UTF-8

UTF-16LE

UTF-16 Little Endian

UTF-16BE

UTF-16 Big Endian

Mac CP10000

Roman

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

APPENDIX D CJK DECODE

CONTROL

Introduction

This appendix describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) bar code decode through USB

HID Keyboard Emulation mode.

CJK Control Parameters

Unicode Output Control

Parameter # 973

For a Unicode encoded CJK bar code, select one of the following options for unicode output:

•

Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and MBCS

expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host.

•

Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such as

MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.

NOTE Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK output.

NOTE To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK

Decode Setup with Windows Host on page D-5.

*Universal Output

(0)

Unicode Application Only

(1)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

D - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

CJK Output Method to Windows Host

Parameter # 972

For a national standard encoded CJK bar code, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows

host:

•

Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or

Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to Unicode

and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control parameter to

control Unicode output.

•

Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character

hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends the

hexadecimal Unicode value to host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the

corresponding IME to accept the CJK character. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on

page D-5.

• Japanese Unicode Output

• Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output

• Simplified Chinese Unicode Output

• Korean Unicode Code Output

• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP)

• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7)

• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP)

• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)

NOTE To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK Decode

Setup with Windows Host on page D-5.

NOTE The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).

*Universal CJK Output

(0)

Japanese Unicode Output

(34)

(for Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese

Unicode IME on the Windows host)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

CJK Decode Control D - 3

CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued

Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output

(1)

Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output

(2)

Korean Unicode Output

(50)

(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese

Unicode IME on the Windows host)

Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP)

(17)

Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7)

(19)

Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows XP)

(18)

Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7)

(20)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

D - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Non-CJK UTF Bar Code Output

Parameter # 960

Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see Country

Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page D-4). Although the default code page can not encode these characters

in a bar code, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 bar code. Scan this parameter bar code to output the Unicode

values by emulation mode.

Use US English IME on Windows. See Unicode Output Control on page D-1.

Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters

Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri

Default code page: CP1251

Missing characters:

NOTE Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 bar code. After decoding,

re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.

Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output

ғ Ғ

ҳ Ҳ

қ Қ

һ Һ

ө Ө

ә Ә

ү Ү

ң Ң

җ Җ

₮

ң Ң

ұ Ұ

қ Қ

ҹ Ҹ

ҝ Ҝ

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

CJK Decode Control D - 5

Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard)

Default code page: CP1250

Missing characters:

Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2)

Default code page: CP1252

Missing character:

₢

Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin

Default code page: CP1254

Missing characters: ә, Ә

Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host

This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.

Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output

To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows:

1. Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor.

2. Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method, set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method]

"EnableHexNumpad"="1"

If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value).

3. Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.

Adding CJK IME on Windows

To add the desired CJK input language:

1. Click Start > Control Panel.

2. If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner.

3. Select Regional and Language Options.

4. Click the Language tab.

ș Ș

ț Ț

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

D - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

5. Under Supplemental Language Support, select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not

already selected, and click Apply. This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This

step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available.

6. Under Text Services and Input Language, click Details.

7. Under Installed Services, click Add.

8. In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method

Editor (IME) to add.

9. Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by

default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system

tray.

10. Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type.

11. Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.

Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host

To select the Simplified Chinese input method:

•

Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa, then click the input bar to select

Unicode or GBK NeiMa input.

•

Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience Input

Style, then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

CJK Decode Control D - 7

Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host

To select the Traditional Chinese input method:

•

Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode

•

Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code

•

Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick. This option support both

Unicode and Big5 input.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

D - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

APPENDIX E PROGRAMMING

REFERENCE

Symbol Code Identifiers

Table E-1 Symbol Code Characters

Code Character Code Type

A UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13

B Code 39, Code 32

C Codabar

Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated

E Code 93

F Interleaved 2 of 5

G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA

H Code 11

J MSI

K GS1-128

L Bookland EAN

M Trioptic Code 39

N Coupon Code

R GS1 DataBar Family

S Matrix 2 of 5

T UCC Composite, TLC 39

U Chinese 2 of 5

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

E - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

V Korean 3 of 5

ISSN EAN

, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417

z Aztec, Aztec Rune

P00 Data Matrix

P01

QR Code, MicroQR

P02 Maxicode

P03 US Postnet

P04 US Planet

P05 Japan Postal

P06 UK Postal

P08 Netherlands KIX Code

P09 Australia Post

P0A USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

P0B UPU FICS Postal

P0C Mailmark

P0D Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror

P0G GS1 Data Matrix

P0H Han Xin

P0Q GS1 QR

P0X Signature Capture

Table E-1 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)

Code Character Code Type

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Programming Reference E - 3

AIM Code Identifiers

Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:

] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)

c = Code Character (see Table E-2)

m = Modifier Character (see Table E-3)

Table E-2 Aim Code Characters

Code Character Code Type

A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32

C Code 128,

ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,

Coupon (Code 128 portion)

d Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix

E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)

e GS1 DataBar Family

F Codabar

G Code 93

H Code 11

h Han Xin

I Interleaved 2 of 5

L PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417

L2 TLC 39

M MSI

QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR

S Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5

U Maxicode

z Aztec, Aztec Rune

X Bookland EAN,

ISSN EAN

, Trioptic Code 39,

Chinese 2 of 5,

Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5,

US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan

Postal, Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code,

USPS 4CB/One Code/

Intelligent Mail, UPU FICS Postal, Mailmark, Signature Capture

]g Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

E - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table E-3.

Table E-3 Modifier Characters

Code Type Option Value Option

Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.

1 Reader has checked one check character.

3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.

4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.

5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and

checked one check character.

7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and

checked and stripped check character.

Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as

]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).

Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356

Code 128 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.

1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.

2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.

Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character

FNC1

in the first

position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID

I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing.

1 Reader has validated check digit.

3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.

Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123

Codabar 0 No check digit processing.

1 Reader has checked check digit.

3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.

Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123

Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905

MSI 0 Check digits are sent.

1 No check digit is sent.

Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as

]M14123

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Programming Reference E - 5

D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123

UPC/EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e. 13 digits for UPC-A,

UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).

1 Two digit supplemental data only.

2 Five digit supplemental data only.

3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A

or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.

4 EAN-8 data packet.

Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905

Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X

ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X

Code 11 0 Single check digit

1 Two check digits

3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.

GS1 DataBar

Family

No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar

Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an

Application Identifier “01”.

Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted

using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).

Example: A

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted

as ]e00110012345678902.

Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

E - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

EAN.UCC

Composites

(GS1 DataBar,

GS1-128,

2D portion of

UPC composite)

Native mode transmission.

Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.

0 Standard data packet.

1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol

separator character.

2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.

3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.

GS1-128 emulation

Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.

1 Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).

PDF417,

Micro PDF417

0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417

symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted,

the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been

invoked or whether data byte 92

DEC

has been doubled in

transmission.

1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel

Interpretation). All data characters 92

DEC

are doubled.

2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character

transmission protocol). Data characters 92

DEC

are not doubled.

Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro

symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape

sequences cannot be transmitted.

3 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword

is 903-907, 912, 914, 915.

4 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword

is in the range 908-909.

5 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword

is in the range 910-911.

Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is

transmitted as ]L2ABCD.

Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Programming Reference E - 7

Data Matrix 0 ECC 000-140, not supported.

1 ECC 200.

2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.

3 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.

4 ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.

5 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.

6 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol

implemented.

MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.

1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.

2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.

3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary

message.

QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol.

Model 2 / MicroQR symbol

, ECI protocol not implemented.

2 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.

3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in

first position.

4 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first

position.

5 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in

second position.

6 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in

second position.

Aztec

0 Aztec symbol.

C Aztec Rune symbol.

Han Xin

0 Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data does

not follow the AIM ECI protocol.

1 ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.

Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.

Grid Matrix, Grid

Matrix Inverse,

Grid Matrix Mirror

0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

E - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

APPENDIX F SAMPLE BAR CODES

UPC/EAN

UPC-A, 100%

UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on

IMPORTANT To read a sample bar code the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the

appropriate enable bar code in Chapter 13, Symbologies.

0 12345 67890

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

F - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC/EAN (continued)

UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on

UPC-E

UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on

0 12345 67890

98765

0 425261 4

0 425261

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Sample Bar Codes F - 3

UPC/EAN (continued)

UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on

EAN-8

EAN-13, 100%

0 425261

87654

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

F - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

UPC/EAN (continued)

EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on

EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on

3 456789 012340

54321

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Sample Bar Codes F - 5

Code 128

GS1-128

Code 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17

123ABC

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

F - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Code 93

Code 11 with 2 Check Digits

Interleaved 2 of 5

2468101275

12345678901231

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Sample Bar Codes F - 7

MSI with 2 Check Digits

Chinese 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

123455834

45454545454

223344

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

F - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Korean 3 of 5

GS1 DataBar

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)

7612341562341

GS1 DataBar Truncated

1400230

(01)00614141999996

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Sample Bar Codes F - 9

GS1 DataBar (continued)

GS1 DataBar Stacked

GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional

GS1 DataBar Limited

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

F - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

GS1 DataBar (continued)

GS1 DataBar Expanded

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Sample Bar Codes F - 11

2D Symbologies

PDF417

Data Matrix

GS1 Data Matrix

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

F - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

2D Symbologies (continued)

Maxicode

QR Code

GS1 QR

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Sample Bar Codes F - 13

2D Symbologies (continued)

MicroQR

Aztec

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789012345

6789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789

Grid Matrix

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

F - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

2D Symbologies (continued)

Han Xin

Postal Codes

US Postnet

UK Postal

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

Sample Bar Codes F - 15

Postal Codes (continued)

Japan Post

Australian Post

5008861

39549554

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

F - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

APPENDIX G NUMERIC BAR CODES

Numeric Bar Codes

For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

G - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Numeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Numeric Bar Codes G - 3

Cancel

To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.

Cancel

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

G - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

APPENDIX H ALPHAUMERIC BAR

CODES

Cancel

To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following bar code.

Cancel

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

H - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes

Space

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 3

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

“

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

H - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

‘

(

)

;

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 5

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

[

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

H - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

]

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 7

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued

NOTE Do not confuse the following bar codes with those on the numeric keypad.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

H - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

End of Message

Cancel

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 9

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

H - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 11

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

H - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 13

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 13

H - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 14

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 15

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 15

H - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 16

Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 17

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

{

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 17

H - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)

}

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 18

APPENDIX I ASCII CHARACTER

SETS

NOTE For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /)

preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you

enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @.

Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

1000 %U CTRL 2

NUL

1001 $A CTRL A

SOH

1002 $B CTRL B

STX

1003 $C CTRL C

ETX

1004 $D CTRL D

EOT

1005 $E CTRL E

ENQ

1006 $F CTRL F

ACK

1007 $G CTRL G

BELL

1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE

BCKSPC

1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB

HORIZ TAB

1010 $J CTRL J

LF/NW LN

1011 $K CTRL K

1012 $L CTRL L

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

I - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER

CR/ENTER

1014 $N CTRL N

1015 $O CTRL O

1016 $P CTRL P

DLE

1017 $Q CTRL Q

DC1/XON

1018 $R CTRL R

DC2

1019 $S CTRL S

DC3/XOFF

1020 $T CTRL T

DC4

1021 $U CTRL U

NAK

1022 $V CTRL V

SYN

1023 $W CTRL W

ETB

1024 $X CTRL X

CAN

1025 $Y CTRL Y

1026 $Z CTRL Z

SUB

1027 %A CTRL [

ESC

1028 %B CTRL \

1029 %C CTRL ]

1030 %D CTRL 6

1031 %E CTRL -

1032 Space Space

Space

1033 /A !

1034 /B “

1035 /C #

1036 /D $

1037 /E %

1038 /F &

1039 /G ‘

‘

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

ASCII Character Sets I - 3

1040 /H (

(

1041 /I )

)

1042 /J *

1043 /K +

1044 /L ,

1045 - -

1046 . .

1047 /o /

1048 0 0

1049 1 1

1050 2 2

1051 3 3

1052 4 4

1053 5 5

1054 6 6

1055 7 7

1056 8 8

1057 9 9

1058 /Z :

1059 %F ;

;

1060 %G <

1061 %H =

1062 %I >

1063 %J ?

1064 %V @

1065 A A

1066 B B

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

I - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

1067 C C

1068 D D

1069 E E

1070 F F

1071 G G

1072 H H

1073 I I

1074 J J

1075 K K

1076 L L

1077 M M

1078 N N

1079 O O

1080 P P

1081 Q Q

1082 R R

1083 S S

1084 T T

1085 U U

1086 V V

1087 W W

1088 X X

1089 Y Y

1090 Z Z

1091 %K [

[

1092 %L \

1093 %M ]

]

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

ASCII Character Sets I - 5

1094 %N ^

1095 %O _

1096 %W ‘

1097 +A a

1098 +B b

1099 +C c

1100 +D d

1101 +E e

1102 +F f

1103 +G g

1104 +H h

1105 +I i

1106 +J j

1107 +K k

1108 +L l

1109 +M m

1110 +N n

1111 +O o

1112 +P p

1113 +Q q

1114 +R r

1115 +S s

1116 +T t

1117 +U u

1118 +V v

1119 +W w

1120 +X x

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

I - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

1121 +Y y

1122 +Z z

1123 %P {

{

1124 %Q I

1125 %R }

}

1126 %S ~

1127

Undefined

7013

ENTER

Table I-2 ALT Key Character Set

ALT Keys Keystroke

2064 ALT 2

2065 ALT A

2066 ALT B

2067 ALT C

2068 ALT D

2069 ALT E

2070 ALT F

2071 ALT G

2072 ALT H

2073 ALT I

2074 ALT J

2075 ALT K

2076 ALT L

2077 ALT M

Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

(Prefix/Suffix

Value for RS-232)

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

Keystroke

ASCII Character

(Applies to RS-232 Only)

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 8-15 or page

12-8.

Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

ASCII Character Sets I - 7

2078 ALT N

2079 ALT O

2080 ALT P

2081 ALT Q

2082 ALT R

2083 ALT S

2084 ALT T

2085 ALT U

2086 ALT V

2087 ALT W

2088 ALT X

2089 ALT Y

2090 ALT Z

Table I-3 GUI Key Character Set

GUI Key Keystroke

3000 Right Control Key

3048 GUI 0

3049 GUI 1

3050 GUI 2

3051 GUI 3

3052 GUI 4

3053 GUI 5

3054 GUI 6

3055 GUI 7

3056 GUI 8

3057 GUI 9

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on

either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to

the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

Table I-2 ALT Key Character Set (Continued)

ALT Keys Keystroke

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

I - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

3065 GUI A

3066 GUI B

3067 GUI C

3068 GUI D

3069 GUI E

3070 GUI F

3071 GUI G

3072 GUI H

3073 GUI I

3074 GUI J

3075 GUI K

3076 GUI L

3077 GUI M

3078 GUI N

3079 GUI O

3080 GUI P

3081 GUI Q

3082 GUI R

3083 GUI S

3084 GUI T

3085 GUI U

3086 GUI V

3087 GUI W

3088 GUI X

3089 GUI Y

3090 GUI Z

Table I-3 GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on

either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to

the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

ASCII Character Sets I - 9

Table I-4 PF Key Character Set

PF Keys Keystroke

4001 PF 1

4002 PF 2

4003 PF 3

4004 PF 4

4005 PF 5

4006 PF 6

4007 PF 7

4008 PF 8

4009 PF 9

4010 PF 10

4011 PF 11

4012 PF 12

4013 PF 13

4014 PF 14

4015 PF 15

4016 PF 16

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

I - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Table I-5 F key Character Set

F Keys Keystroke

5001 F 1

5002 F 2

5003 F 3

5004 F 4

5005 F 5

5006 F 6

5007 F 7

5008 F 8

5009 F 9

5010 F 10

5011 F 11

5012 F 12

5013 F 13

5014 F 14

5015 F 15

5016 F 16

5017 F 17

5018 F 18

5019 F 19

5020 F 20

5021 F 21

5022 F 22

5023 F 23

5024 F 24

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

ASCII Character Sets I - 11

Table I-6 Numeric Key Character Set

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042 *

6043 +

6044 Undefined

6045 -

6046 .

6047 /

6048 0

6049 1

6050 2

6051 3

6052 4

6053 5

6054 6

6055 7

6056 8

6057 9

6058 Enter

6059 Num Lock

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

I - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Table I-7 Extended Key Character Set

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001 Break

7002 Delete

7003 Pg Up

7004 End

7005 Pg Dn

7006 Pause

7007 Scroll Lock

7008 Backspace

7009 Tab

7010 Print Screen

7011 Insert

7012 Home

7013 Enter

7014 Escape

7015 Up Arrow

7016 Dn Arrow

7017 Left Arrow

7018 Right Arrow

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

APPENDIX J COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

FUNCTIONALITY

Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface

Table J-1 lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.

Table J-1 Communication Interface Functionality

Communication Interfaces

Functionality

Data

Transmission

Remote

Management

Image and Video

Transmission

USB

HID Keyboard Emulation Supported Not Available Not Available

Simple COM Port Emulation Not Available Not Available Not Available

SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation Supported Supported Not Available

IBM Table-Top USB Supported Supported Not Available

IBM Hand-Held USB Supported Supported Not Available

USB OPOS Hand-Held Supported Supported Not Available

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without

Imaging Interface

Supported Supported Not Available

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging

Interface

Supported Supported Not Available

RS-232

Standard RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available

ICL RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available

Fujitsu RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Supported Not Available Not Available

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B Supported Not Available Not Available

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

J - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Olivetti ORS4500 Supported Not Available Not Available

Omron Supported Not Available Not Available

CUTE Supported Not Available Not Available

OPOS/JPOS Supported Not Available Not Available

SSI Supported Supported Not Available

IBM 4690

Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) Supported Not Available Not Available

Table-Top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) Supported Supported Not Available

Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Supported Supported Not Available

Keyboard Wedge

IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles Supported Not Available Not Available

IBM AT Notebook Supported Not Available Not Available

Table J-1 Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)

Communication Interfaces

Functionality

Data

Transmission

Remote

Management

Image and Video

Transmission

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

APPENDIX K SIGNATURE CAPTURE

CODE

Introduction

CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows

a scanner to capture a signature.

There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form.

For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and

one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can

be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.

Code Structure

Signature Capture Area

A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in Figure K-1.

Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box.

The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it

towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other

markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.

Figure K-1 CapCode

NOTE Although the DS2278 digital scanner supports signature capture, the quality of the image is not

guaranteed. If the image does not meet your needs it is recommended that you upgrade to a DS8178

scanner.

]

tÇx WÉ

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

K - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

CapCode Pattern Structure

A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a

second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the

start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left

and to the right of the CapCode pattern.

Figure K-2 CapCode Structure

The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.

Start / Stop Patterns

Table K-1 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You

must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured

signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.

Capture Box

Separator Spaces

Start

Stop

Quiet

Zone

Quiet

Zone

Table K-1 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions

Bar/Space Patterns

Type

B S B S B S B

1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2

1 2 2 1 1 1 1 5

2 1 1 2 1 1 1 7

2 2 1 1 1 1 1 8

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Signature Capture Code K - 3

Table K-2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.

BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.

Dimensions

The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The

line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.

The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact

multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and

printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.

Data Format

The decoder output is formatted according to Table K-3. Zebra decoders allow different user options to output or

inhibit bar code type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".

Table K-2 User Defined CapCode Parameters

Parameter Defined

Width Number of pixels

Height Number of pixels

Format JPEG, BMP, TIFF

JPEG quality 1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)

Bits Per Pixel

(not applicable to JPEG format)

1 (2 levels)

4 (16 levels)

8 (256 levels)

Table K-3 Data Format

File Format

(1 byte)

Type (1 byte)

Image Size

(4 bytes, BIG Endian)

Image Data

JPEG - 1

BMP - 3

TIFF - 4

See

Table K-1

, last

column

(Same bytes as in a

data file)

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

K - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Additional Capabilities

Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up.

A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code. You

can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.

Signature Boxes

Figure K-3 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes:

Figure K-3 Acceptable Signature Boxes

Type 2:

Type 5:

Type 7:

Type 8:

Type 9:

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

APPENDIX L NON-PARAMETER

ATTRIBUTES

Introduction

This appendix defines non-parameter attributes.

Attributes

Model Number

Attribute #533

Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example

DS2278-SR00007ZZWW.

Type S

Size (Bytes) 18

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

Serial Number

Attribute #534

Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the

physical device label, for example M1J26F45V.

Type S

Size (Bytes) 16

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

L - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Date of Manufacture

Attribute #535

Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on

the physical device label, for example 30DEC16 (which reads the 30th of April 2014).

Type S

Size (Bytes) 7

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

Date of First Programming

Attribute #614

Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner

either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 30DEC16 (which reads the 30th of December 2016).

Type S

Size (Bytes) 7

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

Configuration Filename

Attribute #616

The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.

To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to

Modified upon scanning any parameter bar code.

Type S

Size (Bytes) 17

User Mode Access RW

Values Variable

NOTE Scanning the Set Defaults bar code automatically changes the configuration filename to factory defaults.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Non-Parameter Attributes L - 3

Beeper/LED

Attribute #6000

Activates the beeper and/or LED.

Type X

Size (Bytes) N/A

User Mode Access W

Values:

Beep / LED Action Value

1 high short beep 0

2 high short beeps 1

3 high short beeps 2

4 high short beeps 3

5 high short beeps 4

1 low short beep 5

2 low short beeps 6

3 low short beeps 7

4 low short beeps 8

5 low short beeps 9

1 high long beep 10

2 high long beeps 11

3 high long beeps 12

4 high long beeps 13

5 high long beeps 14

1 low long beep 15

2 low long beeps 16

3 low long beeps 17

4 low long beeps 18

5 low long beeps 19

Fast warble beep 20

Slow warble beep 21

High-low beep 22

Low-high beep 23

High-low-high beep 24

Low-high-low beep 25

High-high-low-low beep 26

Green LED off 42

Green LED on 43

Red LED on 47

Red LED off 48

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

L - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Parameter Defaults

Attribute #6001

This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.

Type X

Size (Bytes) N/A

User Mode Access W

Values 0 = Restore Defaults

1 = Restore Factory Defaults

2 = Write Custom Defaults

Beep on Next Bootup

Attribute #6003

This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.

Type X

Size (Bytes) N/A

User Mode Access W

Values 0 = Disable beep on next bootup

1 = Enable beep on next bootup

Reboot

Attribute #6004

This attribute initiates a device reboot.

Type X

Size (Bytes) N/A

User Mode Access W

Values N/A

Host Trigger Session

Attribute #6005

This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.

Type X

Size (Bytes) N/A

User Mode Access W

Values 1 = Start Host Trigger Session

0 = Stop Host Trigger Session

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Non-Parameter Attributes L - 5

Firmware Version

Attribute #20004

The scanner's operating system version. For example, PAADES00-001-R00D0.

Type S

Size (Bytes) Variable

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

ImageKit Version

Attribute #20008

Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example IMGKIT_7.03T01.

Type S

Size (Bytes) Variable

User Mode Access R

Values Variable

In Cradle Detect

Attribute #25000

Type Byte

Size (Bytes) 1

User Mode Access R

Values 0 - Out of cradle

1 - In cradle

Charging

Attribute #25002

Type Byte

Size (Bytes) 1

User Mode Access R

Values 0 - Not charging

1 - Charging

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

L - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Battery Charge State

Attribute # 30042

Type Flag

Size (Bytes) 1

User Mode Access R

Values 0 - Not full

1 - Full

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Appendix M FIRMWARE UPGRADES

USING iOS

Introduction

This appendix provides information about performing firmware upgrades using iOS. The Zebra Scanner Control

App for iOS provides an option to update firmware on your Bluetooth connected scanner. This application is

available in iOS App stores and the Zebra AppGallery.

Downloading Firmware Using the Zebra Scanner Control Application

To download firmware:

1. Install the Zebra Scanner Control application on your iOS device.

2. Create a folder on your Windows Desktop named Download.

3. Copy the scanner only plug-in (DS2278SR-SXXX-YY) into the Download folder as follows.

a. Load the 123Scan plug-in onto a Windows computer from: www.Zebra.com/123Scan.

b. From your Windows PC with 123Scan, access the scanner's (scanner only) plug-in (.scnplg file) from

C:\ProgramData\123Scan2\Plug-ins.

c. Copy the plug-in into the Download folder (created in Step 2).

4. Open iTunes and connect your iOS device to your computer via USB.

5. In iTunes, click the iOS device icon shown in Figure M-1.

NOTE In the plug-in name DS2278SR-SXXX-YY, XXX refers to the plug-in revision and YY refers to the build

number. The latest scanner only plug-in can be downloaded from 123Scan.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

M - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Figure M-1 iTunes - iOS Device Icon

6. Select File Sharing from the device menu (for your attached device).

Figure M-2 iTunes File Sharing Option

7. From the Apps list, click Zebra Scanner. Click the Download folder on the right and press Delete on the

keyboard.

iOS Device Icon

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

FIRMWARE UPGRADES USING iOS M - 3

Figure M-3 iTunes - Zebra Scanner Application/Zebra Scanner Documents

8. From the Windows Desktop, drag the Download folder into Zebra Scanner Documents.

9. Click Sync.

10. Open the Zebra Scanner Control application on the iOS device.

11. Connect the scanner to the iOS device and Zebra Scanner Control application.

12. Navigate to the Settings tab in the Zebra Scanner Control application, and tap Update Firmware.

Figure M-4 Settings - Update Firmware

13. Tap UPDATE FIRMWARE to start the process.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

M - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Figure M-5 Update Firmware

14. When the firmware update completes, the scanner automatically resets and installs the firmware.

15. The scanner sounds a beep and the LED illuminates green after the installation is complete.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Appendix N UPGRADING OVER

BLUETOOTH WITHOUT

A CRADLE

Introduction

This appendix provides information about performing upgrades on the scanner without a cradle, using 123Scan.

Upgrading Without a Cradle

To upgrade a DS2278 scanner using 123Scan without a cradle:

1. From the 123Scan Start screen, select Update Scanner Firmware.

2. From the No scanner was found! dialog box, select click here to pair over Bluetooth.

Figure N-1 Pair Over Bluetooth Dialog

3. Scan the pairing bar code that displays to enable Bluetooth communication between the scanner and the host

PC. Once paired (can take 15 seconds), 123Scan guides the user through the remaining steps.

NOTE To accomplish this your PC must support Bluetooth communication.

NOTE The pairing bar code in Figure N-2 is a sample and not for scanning. Scan the actual pairing bar code that

displays in 123Scan.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

N - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Figure N-2 Pairing Bar Code

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions

The Pair over Bluetooth dialog

box (Figure N-1 on page N-1) does

not display.

Scanner and/or cradle with a USB

cable is connected to the PC.

Remove the USB cable connected

to the PC from the scanner and/or

cradle. Re-select Update Scanner

Firmware from the 123Scan Start

screen.

Pairing bar code does not work

correctly.

Scanner was already paired directly

to the PC using the Windows

pairing process.

Select the Bluetooth icon in the PC

tray and remove the scanner from

the Bluetooth connection.

Windows displays the Add a

device pop up window (see Figure

N-3).

N/A This is a Windows display message

that cannot be suppressed.

Do not tap the Add a device

window and continue to follow the

123Scan prompts to complete the

process.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

UPGRADING OVER BLUETOOTH WITHOUT A CRADLE N - 3

Figure N-3 Add a device Window

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

N - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

INDEX

Numerics

123Scan

communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2D bar codes

aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93

aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93

code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-85

data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-87

data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-88

dotcode erasure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100

grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95

grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95

grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-96

GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-90

han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94

han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94

linked QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-92

maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89

microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-90

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

ADF

invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

ADF programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

aiming

orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

aiming options

hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

aiming pattern

enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

ASCII values

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

attributes, non-parameter

battery charge state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-6

beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

imagekit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

in cradle detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

auto-reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-27, 6-29

aztec bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

bar code defaults

radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

Index - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

bar codes

Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-105

Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-106

auto-reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation (HID

peripheral) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93

aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32, 6-34

battery preservation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

battery shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

beeper duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Bluetooth friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3, H-1

Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66

codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57

codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59

codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57, 13-58

codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59

codabar start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . 13-60

code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44

code 11 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46

code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44

code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-85

code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32

code 128 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

code 128 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33

code 128 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-32, 13-33

code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37

code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38

code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-36, 13-37

code 39 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41

code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39, 13-40

code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38

code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41

code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42

composite beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83

composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80

composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79

composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-81

composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80

continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . 13-72

convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-87

data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-88

decode mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54

discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55, 13-56

dotcode erasure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100

EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

EAN-13 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

EAN-8 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101

event reporting

boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52

flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . . 13-101

FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95

grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95

grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-96

GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

GS1 databar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72

GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . 13-73

GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74

GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-90

GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28

GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83

han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94

han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94

hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . 5-18, 5-19

hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

HID device conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50

I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51

I 2 of 5 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54

I 2 of 5 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53

I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2

Index - 3

IBM

bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . 11-6

beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79

interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . 13-51, 13-52, 13-53

interleaved 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . .13-48, 13-49

inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70

ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29

ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-30, 13-31

ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31

ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104

keyboard wedge

alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . 12-6

caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69

LED on good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

linked QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-92

lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

low light scene detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108

manufacturing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66

matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68

matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-67, 13-68

maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89

microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-90

mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61

MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65

MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64

MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-62

MSI reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65

MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64

Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-107

numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3, H-1

parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

pid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

pid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89

quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78

radio

Apple iOS virtual keyboard toggle . . . . . . . . 6-16

auto-reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

bluetooth friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

bluetooth radio state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

bluetooth security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . 6-29

convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

cradle bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

discoverable mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

emulate keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

fast HID keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

HID bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

HID caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

HID function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

HID ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . 6-19

HID keyboard FN1 sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

HID keyboard keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

link supervision timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

pairing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

toggle pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

unpairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

wi-fi friendly channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

wi-fi friendly mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75

RS-232

baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 3

Index - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . .10-11, 10-12

host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-14

stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-77

send versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

SSI

baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

host character time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

symbologies

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

timeout between decodes, different symbols . . 5-23

timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . 5-23

transmit code 11 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . 13-69

transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104

transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103

trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

trigger modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103

unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

unique bar code reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-29

unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82

UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26

UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental AIM ID format . . 13-17

UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental redundancy . . . 13-16

UPC/EAN/JAN supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108

US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

USB

bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . 8-20

beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

CDC beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

CDC host variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . B-2

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

direct I/O beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . 8-14

keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

native firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

quick emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

user preferences

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . 13-107

variable PIN code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

virtual tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

weblink QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-91

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 4

Index - 5

wi-fi friendly channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

wi-fi friendly mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

batch mode stored data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

battery

charging notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

charging with cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

charging with micro USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

preservation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

beeper definitions

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

beeper indicators

ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

macro pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Bluetooth

encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9, 6-16, 6-25

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

pin code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

secure simple pairing IO capability . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

serial port profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

set friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-10

bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

cable configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

CDC host variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

central serial port profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

character sets

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

charging battery

cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

micro USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

cleaning the device

approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

cleaning the devices

how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57

CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57, 13-58

NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59

start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60

code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44

check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32

GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28

ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29

ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-31

ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32, 13-33

code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-85

code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37

code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

code 39 security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39, 13-40

convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36, 13-37

reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, F-5

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38

trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

code identifiers

AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

communication protocol

cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

composite bar codes

beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83

composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 5

Index - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79

composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-81

composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80

GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83

UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82

configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix

cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

product line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

configuring scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

connecting

IBM host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

lost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

conventions

notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi

country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

cradle

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

inserting scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

presentation

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

supply power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

cradle indicators

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

standard use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

cradle indicators (host controlled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11, F-13

decode zones

ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

digital scanner

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55, 13-56

eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

error indications

ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

exposure options

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

firmware

flash update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29, 5-30

LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

updates

LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

scanner control app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1

version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

grid matrix bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

gs1 data matrix bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar bar codes

convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . 13-72

GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72

GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . 13-73

GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71

GS1 databar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

GS1 QR bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

han xin bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14

HID Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

host specific indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

host types

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 6

Index - 7

IBM

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

low light scene detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

image options

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50

convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51

febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48, 13-49

reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51

keyboard types (country codes)

Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, B-4

Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-10

Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 7

Index - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

keyboard wedge

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Korean 2 of 5 bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69

LED indicators

ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

cradle, host controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

macro pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

locked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

locked pairing mode bar codes

radio pairing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

macro PDF

escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101

flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101

macro pdf indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

approved cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66

check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-67, 13-68

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69

maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

micro USB cable

charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

convert CDC device to HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

HID device conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

microQR code bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61

check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65

check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-62

reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64

msi bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

non-parameter attributes

battery charge state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-6

beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2

firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

imagekit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

in cradle detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5

model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4

serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

out of range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

bar code format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

central/peripheral setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-27, A-4

on contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, A-4

pin codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-29

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 8

Index - 9

using scan-to-connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 6-31

pairing beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

parameter defaults

radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

parameter programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

parameters

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32, 6-34

beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32, 6-34

connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . 6-29

host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28, 6-29

parts

scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84

PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

PIN code

static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

pinouts

cradle signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

postal code bar codes

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14

postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-105

Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-106

Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104

mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108

Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-107

transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104

transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103

UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103

UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108

US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . 13-107

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

product id (pid) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

product line configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89, 13-90, 13-91

sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12, F-13

quick start guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

radio communication

bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

bluetooth technology profile support . . . . . . . . . 1-10

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

radio communications

defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

radio indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

reconnect pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

RS-232

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4, 10-6

RSM

commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

sample bar codes

aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, F-5

code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11, F-13

grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14

interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

Korean 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

msi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12, F-13

UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14

UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 9

Index - 10DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14

scanner control app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-4, M-1

scanner parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

scanner to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

scanner(s) to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

scanning

aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

errors . . . . . . . .5-2, 8-1, 9-10, 10-2, 11-2, 12-1, 13-2

hand-held mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

radio communications sequence example . . . . . 6-2

sequence example . 5-2, 8-1, 9-10, 10-2, 11-1, 12-1,

13-2

setting parameters . .5-1, 6-1, 8-1, 9-10, 10-1, 11-1,

12-1, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

scanning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

scan-to-connect utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 6-31

secure simple pairing IO capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

security

intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79

quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78

redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75

security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-77

Serial Port Profile

central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

setup

connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . 12-2

inserting scanner in cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

lost host connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

supplying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

shut off battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

signature capture options

signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

simple serial interface

baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1, 9-6

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-6

RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

scanner control app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

scan-to-connect utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 6-31

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

SPP

central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

SSI

baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1, 9-6

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-6

RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 6-31

stored data

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

unicode

output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

unlocked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

unpairing

bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-29

UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes

bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18, 13-19, 13-20

convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26

samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 10

Index - 11

supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

USB

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

user preferences bar codes

batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32, 6-34

beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

version

bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

virtual tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

wi-fi friendly mode

channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

wireless indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Zebra support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 11

Index - 12DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 12

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 1

MN-002915-13EN Revision A - January 2023

Zebra Technologies Corporation, Inc.

3 Overlook Point

Lincolnshire, IL 60069, U.S.A.

www.zebra.com

ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation,

registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their

reserved.

ds2278-prg-en.book Page 2